TM-1810-AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Pipework Modelling

Training TM-1810
AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)
Guide Pipework Modelling


Pipework Modelling TM-1810
This page is intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2013 2 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.


Revision Log
Date Revision Description Author Reviewed Approved
18/01/201
013
3 0.1 Issued fo
forr Review AVEVA
EVA E3D™ (1.1) AH
13/02/2013 0.2 Reviewed AH PJH
05/03/201
013
3 1.0 Issued fo
forr Tra
Training AVEV
AVEVA
A E3D™ (1.1) AH PJH PJH
20/01/201
014
4 1.1 Issued fo
forr Review AVEVA
EVA E3D™(1.1) CT
21/01/2014 1.2 Reviewed CT KB
KB
21/01/201
014
4 2.0 Issued fo
forr Tra
Training AVEV
AVEVA
A E3D™(1.1) CT KB KB
26/10/201
015
5 2.1 Issued fo
forr Review AVEVA
EVA E3D™ (2.1) AH
16/11/2015 2.2 Reviewed AH E
EBB
27/11/201
015
5 3.0 Issued fo
forr Tra
Training AVEV
AVEVA
A E3D™(2.1) AH EB KB
Updates
Change highli
Change highlight
ghting
ing wil
willl be empl
employe
oyedd for all revisi
revisions.
ons. W here
here new or changed
changed informat
information
ion is presen
presented
ted
section
section headings
headings will be highlighted
highlighted in Yellow.
Yellow.
Suggestion / Problems
If you
you hav
havee a sugge
suggest
stio
ion
n abou
aboutt th
this
is manua
manuall or th
the
e syste
system
m to wh
whic
ich
h it re
refer
fers
s pl
pleas
ease
e rep
report
ort it to AVEVA
AVEVA
Training & Product Support at tps@aveva.com
at tps@aveva.com
This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may
not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your
licence conditions.
at http://www.aveva.com
Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA
AVEVA does
does not w
warra
arrant
nt that
that the
the use of
of the AVEVA
AVEVA softw
software
are will
will be
be uninte
uninterrup
rrupted,
ted, error
error-fr
-free
ee or free
free
from viruses.
1.2 AVEVA
AVEVA shall
shall not be liabl
liable
e for: lloss
oss of
of profits;
profits; loss
loss of
of busine
business;
ss; deple
depletio
tion
n of goodwil
goodwilll and/or
and/or simila
similar
r
losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of
data
data or inf
informa
ormatio
tion;
n; any special
special,, indirec
indirect,
t, consequ
consequenti
ential
al or pure economi
economic c loss,
loss, cos
costs,
ts, dama
damages
ges,,
charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user
resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of
whetherr such losses are suffered directly
whethe directly or indirectly,
indirectly, or arise in contract,
contract, tort (including
(including negligence)
negligence)
or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability

liability in contrac
contract,
t, tort (including
(including negligence),
negligence), or otherwise,
otherwise, arising in connection
connection with
with
the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year
in which the user's claim is brought.
1.4 Clause
Clauses
s 1.1
1.1 to 1.3 shall
shall apply
apply to the
the fullest
fullest extent
extent permissi
permissible
ble at law.
law.
1.5 In the
the eve
event
nt of any
any confli
conflict
ct bet
betwe
ween
en the abov
above
e clauses
clauses and
and the analo
analogou
gous
s clauses
clauses in
in the soft
softwar
ware
e
licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall
take precedence.



Copyright Notice
All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to, copyright in this Training Guide and the associated
documentation
documen tation belong
belongss to or is licensed
licensed to AVEVA Solutions Limited or its affiliates.
affiliates.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliates companies. The information contained in
thi
this
s Trainin
Trainingg Guide
Guide and associa
associated
ted documen
documentati
tation
on is commerc
commercialially
ly sensit
sensitive
ive,, and shall
shall not be adapted
adapted,,
copied
cop ied,, reprodu
reproduced
ced,, stored
stored in a ret
retriev
rieval
al system,
system, or tra
transmi
nsmitte
tted
d in any form or medium
medium by any mean
meanss
(in
(inclu
cludin
ding
Limited. gWhere
photoco
photocopyi
pying
such ng or electr
electroni
permission isonic
c means)
mean
granted, s) witho
without
AVEVA ut the prior
Solutionsprior written
written
Limited permiss
permission
expressly ion of that
requires AVEV
AVEVA
theADisclaimer
Sol
Soluti
utions
ons
included in this Training Guide and this Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every
copy that is made.
Licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency or any other reproduction rights organisation do not
apply. If any unauthorised acts are carried out in relation to this copyright work, a civil claim for damages
may be made and or criminal prosecution may result.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its affiliate companies shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a
th
thir
ird
d pa
party
rty's
's in
inte
tell
llec
ectu
tual
al pro
prope
perty
rty rights
rights ar
aris
isin
ing
g from
from th
the
e use
use of this
this Tra
Train
inin
ing
g Guid
Guide
e and
and asso
associ
ciat
ated
ed
documentation.
@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015
Trademark Notice
AVEVA™, AVEVA
AVEVA Everyth
Everything
ing3D
3D™, AVEVA E3D™, [AVEV[AVEVAA Tags]
Tags],, Tri
Tribo
bon
n and al
alll AVEVA
AVEVA pr
produ
oduct
ct and
and
service names are trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries
Use of these trademarks, product and service names belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is
strictly forbidden, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Group plc or AVEVA Solutions Limited. Any
unauthorised use may result in a legal claim being made against you.
Flue
Fluent
nt is a tr
trade
ade mark
mark of Micro
Microso
soft
ft Corpo
Corpora
rati
tion
on.. The Fluent
Fluent user
user in
inte
terfa
rface
ce is lice
licens
nsed
ed fro
from
m Micro
Microso
soft
ft
Corporation by AVEVA and use of the Fluent trademark is strictly forbidden.
All other trademarks belong to their respective owners and cannot be used without the permission of the
owner.


CONTENTS
1 Introductio
Introduction
n ...............
...............................
................................
................................
................................
.................................
.................................
............................9
............9
1.1 Objectives ..........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Prerequi
Prerequisites
sites ...........
................
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 10
1.3 Course Structure.............................................................................................................................
Structure............................................................................................................................. 10
1.4 Using this Guide .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. 10
2 Pipin
Piping
g in AVE
VEVA
VA E3D™ (Bas
E3D (Basic
ic Conc
Concepts
epts)) ..............
..............................
................................
................................
...........................11
...........11
2.1 Setting Up the Traini
Training ng Course..........
Course................ ............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 11
2.2 Access
Accessing
ing the Pipework Application......
Application............ ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 12
2.3 Piping Tab........................................................................................................................................
Tab........................................................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Pipe Model Hierarchy ..... ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 13
2.5 Piping Specifications...................................................................................................................
Specifications...................................................................................................................... ... 14
2.6 Pipe Editor:- Create Pipe Form..... Form...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 15
2.7 Pipe Cre
Creation
ation – (Worked
(Worked Example)
Example) ...........
.................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
..... 16
2.8 Pipe Branch Heads and Tails ..... ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 17
2.8.1 Branch Head Attributes
Attributes ..........
................
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 17
2.8.2 Branch Tail Attributes ...................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
..........
.... 17
2.9 Modify Pipe Form..............
Form....................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
.........
... 18
2.10 Updating
Updating Pipe & Branch Data ...... ...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 19
2.11 Pipe Branch Head/Tail
Head/Tail Positioned
Positioned Explicitly..........
Explicitly............................
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
.........
.... 20
2.12 Pipe Branch Head/Tail
Head/Tail Connected
Connected – (Worked Example)..............
Example)................... ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 21
2.13 Modify Pipe Form - cont continued....
inued..........
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 23
2.14 Navigating
Navigating Pipes
Pipes and Branches ............
..................
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 24
Exercise
Exercise 1 – Cre
Create
ate Pipe
Pipes
s Head
Head/Tail..........
/Tail..........................
................................
................................
................................
................................26
................26
3 Component
Component Crea
Creation
tion and Modif
Modificat
ication.......................
ion........................................
.................................
................................
.......................27
.......27
3.1 Pipe Bra
Branch
nch Components
Components (Pipe Fittings)......
Fittings)............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 27
3.2 Arrive and Leave Points ......
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
.......
.. 28
3.3 Piping C
Component
omponent Editor
Editor Form - Creation Creation ..........
................
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
.........
.... 29
3.3.1 Selecting
Selecting fr
from
om an Altern
Alternative
ative Specification...........
Specification................ ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 30
3.4 Piping Component
Component Editor
Editor FormForm – Creation
Creation – (Worked Example) Example) ...........
................
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
.......
.. 31
3.5 Compone
Component nt Sequence List ............
..................
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 34
Component Editor
Editor Form – Modification..........
Modification................ ............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
..... 35
3.6.1 Forwards
Forwards / Backwards
Backwards Mode Mode ...........
.................
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 36
3.6.2 Positioning
Positioning & Frequentl
Frequently y Used Functions
Functions ........
..............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 37
3.6.3 Rotation
Rotation and Direction
Direction Tools ...........
.................
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 46
3.6.4 Orientation
Orientation Functions
Functions ...........
.................
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
..... 50
3.6.5 Other Functions
Functions ............
..................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 55
Component Editor
Editor Form – Modification
Modification – (Worked (Worked Example)
Example) ...........
.................
...........
...........
............
...........
..... 57
3.8 Branch C Components
omponents Hierarchy
Hierarchy Order Order ............
..................
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 59
3.9 Inserti
Inserting
ng Inline Fittings ............
..................
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
..........
.... 60
3.10 Deleting
Deleting Components
Components ...........
.................
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 62
3.11 Deleting
Deleting a Range of Piping
Piping Components
Components ........... ................
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
..... 63
Component Editor Form – Inline Fittings – (Worked Example)....... Example)............. ...........
...........
............
..........
.... 64
3.13 Completing
Completing the Arrangement
Arrangement - Copying Copying – (Worked Example) Example) ............
..................
............
............
............
............
...........
..... 75
Exercise
Exercise 2 – Comp
Componen
onentt Crea
Creation
tion – Pipe /100
/100-B-8..............
-B-8..............................
................................
................................
.....................78
.....78
Component Editor Form – Reselection
Reselection ............
..................
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
........
... 80
Component Editor Form – Reselection
Reselection – (Worked Example)..........
Example)................ ...........
...........
...........
..........
..... 81
4 Integrator
Integrator Mode............................
Mode............................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
........................83
........83
4.1 Compare 3D Model Against
Against Schematic
Schematic Data
Data ............
.................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 83
4.2 Build 3D Model from Schematic
Schematic Data
Data ............
.................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
....... 84
5 Using the Edito
Editorr ................
................................
................................
................................
................................
.................................
.................................107
................107
5.1 Genera
Generall Use of the Editor...........
Editor.................
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 107
5.2 Quick Pipe Router............
Router..................
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 121
5.2.1 Fitting
Fitting to Fitting Functi
Functionality.....
onality...........
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 122



5.2.2 Quick Pipe Routing Using Elbows

Elbows – (Worked Example) Example) ............
..................
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 124
5.2.3 Pipe Routing
Routing Using Bends.........
Bends...............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 127
5.2.4 Pipe Routing
Routing Using
Using Bends - Fabricat
Fabrication ion Machine
Machine – ((Worked Worked Example).........
Example)............... ...........
...........
............
........ 129
5.3 Changin
Changing
g to Alternative
Alternative Fabrication
Fabrication Machine
Machine Bend – (Wo (Workedrked Example)......
Example)............ ...........
...........
...........
.......
.. 133
Exercise
Exercise 5 – Quick Pipe Router – /100
/100-C-1
-C-13...........
3...........................
................................
................................
.................................135
.................135
6 Sloping
Sloping Pipe
Pipes
s ...............
...............................
................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
......................137
......137
6.1 Sloping Components
Components Using
Using the Modify Functions.
Functions. ...........
................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
..... 137
6.2 Creati
Creating
ng a Sloping
Sloping Pipe
Pipe – (Worked
(Worked Exa
Example)..........
mple)...............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 140
6.3 Retros
Retrospective
pective Sloping
Sloping of Pipes.............
Pipes...................
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 146
6.4 Retros
Retrospective
pective Sloping of Pipes
Pipes – (Worked Example) ............ ..................
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
.........
... 149
Exercise
Exercise 6 – Cre
Creating
ating Sloping Pipes - /100
/100-C-1
-C-17
7 ..............
..............................
................................
................................
......................152
......152
7 Pipework
Pipework Spec
Spec/Bore
/Bore Modif
Modificat
ication..........................
ion..........................................
................................
................................
...........................155
...........155
7.1 Pipework Component
Component Bore and Specification Specification Modification
Modification ............
..................
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
..... 155
7.1.1 Modify Compon
Components ents Form
Form .....
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 155
7.1.2 Component
Component Selection
Selection ...........
.................
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
.........
... 156
7.1.3 Modifying
Modifying Component
Component Specificati
Specifications ons .......
............
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........ 157
7.1.4 Error Messages .......................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... 158
7.1.5 Highlighting ................................................................
..............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 159
7.1.6 Choosing
Choosing a Component
Component...... ............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 160
7.1.7 Modifying
Modifying Component
Component Bore Bore ......
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 161
7.1.8 Modifying
Modifying Insulatio
Insulation n and Tracing
Tracing Specificat
Specifications ions ......
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 161
7.2 Modifyi
Modifying
ng a Sp
Specifica
ecificationtion – (Worked
(Worked Example)........
Example)............. ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 162
Exercise 7 - Modif
Exercise Modify
y Specif
Specificati
ication
on – Pipe /200-B-4
/200-B-4 ...............
...............................
................................
................................
...................
...166
166
8 Piping As
Assemb
semblies
lies ...............
...............................
................................
................................
................................
................................
..............................167
..............167
8.1 Using Assemblies .........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... 167
9 Splitting
Splitting and Merg
Merging...........
ing...........................
................................
................................
................................
................................
..............................171
..............171
9.1 Pipe Splitting .................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. 171
9.1.1 Splitting Options.......................................................................................................................
Options....................................................................................................................... 172
9.1.2 Split Pipes
Pipes on a Plane ........................
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 172
9.1.3 Split Pipes
Pipes into Segments..........
Segments................ ............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........
.. 175
9.1.4 Split by Moving
Moving Component.....
Component........... ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 176
9.1.5 Assembly Tab......
Tab ...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
........
.. 177
9.1.6 Performing
Performing the Split......
Split ............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 178
9.1.7 Splitting
Splitting Pipes
Pipes on a Plane – (Worked Example)...... Example)............ ............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........
.. 178
9.1.8 Splitting
Splitting into
into Segments
Segments – (Worked (Worked Example)........
Example)............. ...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
........
.. 181
9.2 Merge Pipe / Branch ..........
................
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 183
9.2.1 Merge Pipe
Pipe – (Worked Example) Example) ...........
................
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........
.. 183
Exercise
Exercise 8 – Comp
Completin
leting
g the Pipe
Pipeworkwork ...............
................................
.................................
................................
................................
...................
...185
185
10 Data Cons
Consisten
istency.........................
cy.........................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
...................
...197
197
10.1 Data Consistency
Consistency ............
..................
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
.........
... 197
10.1.1 Possible Types of Data Error................................................................................................... 197
10.1.2 Accessing
Accessing the Data Consistency
Consistency Checks ........... ................
...........
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
.......
.. 198
10.1.3 The Report Format ..................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................. 199
10.1.4 Data Consistency
Consistency Diagno
Diagnostic stic Messages ...........
.................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
.........
... 200
10.1.5 Example of Diagnostic Messages ..................................................................
...........................................................................................
......................... 200
Exercise
Exercise 9 – Data Cons
Consistenc
istency
y ...............
...............................
................................
................................
................................
................................
.................. 205
11 Pipe Pene
Penetrat
tration
ion and Hole Mana
Manageme
gement
nt ...............
...............................
................................
................................
........................207
........207
11.1 Introduction
Introduction to Hole Management
Management ...........
................
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 207
11.1.1 Request
Request and Approval Workflow ...........
.................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 208
11.2 Introduction
Introduction to Non-Penetration
Non-Penetration Managed Holes ..... ...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 208
11.3 Use of the Hole Management
Management Application
Application ...........
................
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 208
11.4 Creating
Creating Single Penetrations
Penetrations ...........
.................
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 209
11.4.1 ATTA From Pipe Spec............................................................................................................. 210
11.4.3 Pipe Penetration
Penetration Examples (Standard
(Standard Types) ............................
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
........
.. 214



11.5 The Hole Management

Management Utility................
Utility......................
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 215
11.5.1 Create Holes Section............................................................................................................... 215
11.5.2 Merge Holes ............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 219
11.5.3 Modify Holes ............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ 220
11.5.4 Utilities .....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... 221
11.6 Creating
Creating Non-Penetration
Non-Penetration Managed Holes – Free Holes........ Holes..............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........
.. 225
11.6.1 Free Holes ................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
............................................................... 225
11.7 Hole Managemen
Management...... t............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
.........
... 230
11.7.1 Hole Association Filters ...........................................................................................................
........................................................................................................... 230
11.7.2
11.7.3 Show Tags ................................................................
Translucent...............................................................................................................................
...............................................................
..................................... 232
Penetrated ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................... 233
11.7.4 Hole Association Options ..................................................................
........................................................................................................
...................................... 233
11.7.5 Managing
Managing Hole Associa
Associations tions ...........
.................
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 234
12 Clash Dete
Detection..............
ction..............................
.................................
.................................
................................
................................
................................239
................239
12.1 Accessing
Accessing the Clashes Form ...........
.................
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
..........
.... 239
12.2 Executing
Executing a Clash Check ...........
................
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 239
Exer
Exercise
cise 11 – Clas
Clash
h Det
Detectio
ection
n ................
................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
.................. 241
13 Design
Design Chec
Checker.................
ker.................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
..............................243
..............243
13.1 Validation
Validation Philosophy........
Philosophy........................
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 243
13.2 Design Checker ...........
.................
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
....... 243
13.2.2 Design Checker Results ..........................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 246
13.3 Design Checker – (Worked
(Worked Example)Example) ....... ............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
..........
.... 247
Exercise
Exercise 12 – Des
Design
ign Chec
Checker
ker ................
................................
................................
................................
................................
................................
.................. 248
14 Creating
Creating Isome
Isometrics
trics................
.................................
.................................
................................
................................
................................
........................249
........249
14.1 Creating
Creating Pipe Isometrics
Isometrics ............
..................
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
............
........
.. 249
14.2 Creating
Creating System Isometrics..........
Isometrics...............
...........
...........
...........
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
...........
...........
...........
...........
...........
..... 250
Exercise
Exercise 13 – Cre
Creating
ating Isome
Isometrics...............
trics...............................
.................................
.................................
................................
...........................251
...........251
Appendix
Appendix – A Piping Settin
Settings
gs Form ...............
...............................
................................
................................
................................
.........................253
.........253
A.1 - Piping Settings Form – Component Editor ..................................................................................
.................................................................................. 253
A.1.1 - Snap Distance ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................................
.................................................. 253
A.1.2 - Min. Tube.......................................................................................................................
Tube....................................................................................................................................
............. 254
A.1.3 - Auto Align ...................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................... 254
A.1.4 - Auto Create/Select Adjacent Out of Spec/Skip Connected Comps ........................................... 254
A.1.5 – Multiple Slope Functionality .......................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... 255
A.1.6 – Non Standard Branch Connections ................................................................
...........................................................................................
........................... 255
A.2 – Piping Settings Form - Pipe Editor............................................................................................... 255
A.2.1 – Sort Piping Specification List ..........................................................................
.....................................................................................................
........................... 255
A.2.2 - Auto Create Gaskets and Flanges at Branch............................................................................. 256
A.3 - Piping Settings Form – Selection.................................................................................................. 256
A.3.1 - Descriptions.................................................................
Descriptions ................................................................................................................................
............................................................... 256
A.3.2 - Tag Component.......................................................................................................................... 256
A.3.3 - Tag Constraints ..........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................... 257
A.3.4 - Auto Reconnect ........................................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.................................................. 257
A.3.5 - Reconnect Free Ends................................................................................................................. 257
A.3.6 - Ignore Positioned........................................................................................................................
Positioned........................................................................................................................ 257
A.4 – Piping Settings Form – Laser Data ............................................................................................
..............................................................................................
.. 257
A.5 - Piping Settings Form – Direction Display ......................................................................
....................................................................................
.............. 257
Appendix
Appendix B – Insula
Insulation
tion and Trac
Tracing
ing................
................................
................................
................................
................................
......................259
......259
B.1 - Adding / Controlling
Controlling Insulation ..........................................................................
.....................................................................................................
........................... 259
B.1.1 - Controlling Insulation between Components.............................................................................. 260
B.2 - Adding Tracing................................................................................................................................
Tracing................................................................................................................................262
262
Appe
Appendix
ndix C – Desig
Design
n Chec
Checker
ker Ad
Admin
min Over
Overview
view ..............
..............................
................................
................................
......................263
......263
C.1 - Design Checker Admin Form ......................................................................................................
........................................................................................................
.. 263
C.1.2 - Vent High Points Admin
Admin Detail ........................................................................
...................................................................................................
........................... 264
C.1.3 - Drain Low Points Admin Detail ....................................................................................
..................................................................................................
.............. 265



C.1.4 - Valve Stem Orientation Admin Detail ........................................................................................

........................................................................................ 265


CHAPTER 1
1 Introd
Introduct
uction
ion
Alongside the other primary modelling processes pipe routing is a time consuming activity on any project.
The aim of the course is to provide the skills required to use the AVEVA Everything3D ™ (AVEVA E3D™)
Pipework application in the most productive way. It will introduce some of the techniques that are used in
the other
other Model applic
applicatio
ations
ns and provide
provide an unde
understa
rstandi
nding
ng of pip
piping
ing compone
components
nts,, rout
routing
ing,, che
checki
cking
ng
isometrics and simple clash detection.
1.1 Objectives
At the end of this training course participants will able to:-
 Understand
Understand the ba
basic
sic concepts
concepts of pipes
pipes and branches
branches
 Understand
Understand the us
use
e of piping specifi
specification
cations
s in AVEVA E3D
 Understand
Understand the concep
conceptt of branch heads and tails, the importance
importance of compon
component
ent list order
order and
flow direction within a Branch
 Create position
position and
and orientate
orientate piping components.
components.
 Modify pipe, branch and component

components
s
 Copying
Copying pipe,
pipe, branch
branch and
and components
components
 Deleting
Deleting pipe,
pipe, branch
branch and components
components
 Use Integrator
Integrator Mode
Mode to compare with
with and build
build from the 2D
2D Diagram.
Diagram.
 Use the Editor
 Use Quick Pipe Router
 Use Fabricati
Fabrication
on Machines
Machines to obtain
obtain bends
bends
 Create sloping pipes
Modify bore and specification

specification
 Use assemblies
 Perform Splitting
Splitting and
and merging
merging of pipes
pipes
 Run Data Consisten

Consistency
cy and to understand
understand most of the diagnostic
diagnostic messages
messages
 Perform simple Clash Checks.
 Use Design Checker
 Produce Check Isometrics



1.2 Prerequis
isit
ite
es
It is expected that trainees will have completed the TM – 1801 AVEVA Everything3D Foundations training
course
cou rse.. Trainee
Trainees
s who
who can demonst
demonstrat
rate
e a suitab
suitable
le underst
understand
anding
ing of oth
other
er AVEVA E3D applic
applicati
ations
ons and
techniques may also be permitted to undertake the training.
1.3 Cou
ourrse Str
truc
uctu
turre
Training
Each will consist
workstation willofhave
oral aand visualproject
training presentations,
populateddemonstrations, worked
with model objects. Thisexamples andby
will be used set exercises.
the trainees
to practice their methods and complete the set exercises.
1.4 Usin
ing
g th
thiis Gu
Guiide
Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document. A summary of these
styles is provided below.
by bold dark turquoise text.

Button press actions are indicated by bold text.
Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.

text.
Where supplementary information is provided, or reference is made to other documentation, the following
symbols and styles will be used.
 Additional information
 Refer to other documentation
documentation
System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose

i.e. 'Choose function' .
Example files or inputs will be in the b

bold
old c
courier new font.
ourier


CHAPTER 2
2 Pipi
Piping
ng in AV
AVEV
EVA
A E3D
E3D™ (Basic Concepts)
2.1
2.1 Sett
Settin
ing
g Up th
the
e Tr
Trai
aini
ning
ng Co
Cour
urse
se
Login to AVEVA E3D using the details provided by the Trainer. They will typically be as shown below:
Project: Training
User: A.PIPER
Password: A
MDB: A-PIPING
Click the Model
the Model tile.
tile.
On th
the
e Tools ta
tab,
b, in the Training group,
group, click
click the
the Setup button
button to dis
display
play the
Training Setup form.
Setup form.
Fro
From thethe Piping tab
tab sesellect
ect the
the
Pipewor
Pipework k Modelling
Modelling radio
radio button
button to
indica
indicate
te the curcurren
rentt trai
training
ning course
course..
Checking the Setup
the Setup Training Course
checkbox will display a Warning
a Warning form.
form.
Click the OK
the OK button.
Clicking the Apply button will update the project to prepare for the start of the training course. Click the
Close button.
Close button.
 Compl
Completed
eted Exercises
Exercises are available via the Training
the Training Setup form
Setup form and may be accessed by the Trainer if
required.



2.2
2.2 Acc
cces
essi
sing
ng th
the
e Pi
Pipe
pewor
work
k Ap
Appli
plica
catio
tion
n
A default screen layout will be displayed comprising the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ –based user interface
and a Model
a Model Explorer showing
showing all the objects from the current project databases.
Once the Model
the Model module
module has been started, it must be checked that the Pipework
Pipework applicati
application
on is running.
running. This
T his
can be seen on the options list at top of the model framework, in the screenshot below it is showing the
General application. This can be changed by selecting Piping
General application. Piping from
from the options list as shown.
the Piping
Selecting the Piping application
application will add the Piping
Piping tab
tab to the new Microsoft® Office Fluent ™ –based user
interface.
2.3 Piping Tab

The Piping
The Piping tab
tab is used to manipulate pipes, branches and branch components and also invoke the functions
and tools specific to the Pipework
the Pipework application.
application. It is split into nine groups:-
 Create
 Modify
 Delete
 Tools
 Penetrate
 Isometrics
 Supports

Pipe Fabrication
 Pipe Stress Interface
 Thro
Througho
ughout
ut this tra
traini
ining
ng gui
guide
de it wil
willl be ass
assume
umed
d that the
the Piping
Piping tab is being used unless otherwise
stated.



2.4 Pip
ipe
e Mo
Mode
dell Hie
iera
rarrch
chy
y
There is a separate model hierarchy for pipe routing, as shown below. In principle, each pipe element may
own
ow n a numbe
numberr of branc
branche
hes.s. In tu
turn
rn,, br
bran
anche
ches
s may own
own a nu
numbe
mberr of pi
pipi
ping
ng compo
componenent
nts,
s, e.g.
e.g. valv
valves
es,,
reducers, tees, flanges, etc.
The difference between pipes and branches is that a branch is only considered to have two ends, while a
pipe may have any number of ends, depending on the number of branches it owns.
A pipe with three ends and two branches is shown below. The second
branch is connected to the first at the tee.
This demonstrates
demonstrates another
another piping
piping hierarchy
hierarchy rule. Although
Although a branch
only has two ends, it may own components (in this case a tee) which
connect
conne ct to other branches.
These simple concepts enable any number of piping configurations to

be developed, and forms the basis of all existing designed AVEVA
E3D pipework.
An alternative pipe configuration that still complies with these rules
is shown here. In this instance the branch leaves the tee through
the offline leg.
Pipe branches serve two purpose

purposes:-
s:-
 They define
define the start and finish
finish points of a pipe route
route (known as the Head and Tail
Tail in AVEVA
E3D).
 They own the

the piping component
components,
s, which define
define the
the route.
The position and order of the piping components below branch level determine the physical route. In AVEVA
E3
E3D
D it is only
only ne
nece
cess
ssary
ary to co
cons
nsid
ider
er th
the
e fi
fitti
tting
ngs
s be
beca
caus
use
e the pi
pipe
pe that
that ap
appe
pear ars
s betwe
between
en fitti
fittings
ngs is
automatically set (or implied) by AVEVA E3D according to the specifications of the fittings.



2.5
2.5 Pipi
Piping
ng Sp
Spec
ecif
ific
icat
atio
ions
ns
In the same
same way that desi
design
gn off
offic
ices
es ha
have
ve st
stand
andard
ard pipipi
ping
ng speci
specifi
fica
cati
tions
ons,, AVE
AVEVA
VA E3D has a set set of
specifications from which the designer can select. All the components within AVEVA E3D must be defined in
the Catalogue and be placed in a Specification before they can be selected. In the Training Project there are
three such specifications:
 A1A = ANSI CLASS 150 CARBO N STEEL
A3B = ANSI CLASS 300 CARBO N STEEL

 F1C = ANSI CLASS 150 STAINLESS STEEL
These speci
These specifi
fica
cati
tion
ons
s contai
contain
n al
alll th
the
e fit
fitti
ting
ngs
s requi
required
red fo
forr the
the cours
coursee ex
exer
erci
cises
ses.. An impor
importa
tant
nt poin
pointt to
remember when using the application is which specification is currently being used as the default.
Fo
Forr th
the
e Train
Trainin
ing
g Proje
Project
ct,, the fir
first
st le
lett
tter
er in the pipe
pipe na
name
me repre
represe
sent
nts
s the speci
specifi
fica
cati
tion
on to be used
used.. Fo
For
r
example, the PIPE
the PIPE /150-B-5 has
/150-B-5 has the letter ‘B’ to represent the specification.
The specification letters are as follows: -
 A = /A
/A1A
 B = /A
/A3B
 C = /F1
/F1C
C



2.6
2.6 Pipe
Pipe Ed
Edit
itor
or:-
:- Cr
Crea
eate
te Pi
Pipe
pe Fo
Form
rm
In the Create
the Create group
group click the Create
the Create
Pipe button
Pipe button to display the Pipe
the Pipe Editor:
Create Pipe form.
Pipe form.
The Pipe
The Pipe Editor: Create Pipe form
Pipe form is now displayed
The upper section of the form allows the Pipe Name to be

entered and the Primary
the Primary System to
System to be selected.
The middle
middle section
section of the form all
allows
ows the selecti
selection
on of the
specificati
specification
on for the pipe.
The lower
lower secti
section
on of the
the form
form is the
the Basic
Basic Pipe Proc
Process
ess
Data:-
Data:-
 Bore
Bore field indicated on the form is the nominal
bore for this pipe and does not affect the pipe
route.
 Insulation Spec
 Tracing Spec
 Temperature
 Pressure
 Slope Ref.
Not all of these fields are mandatory.
Clicking the Apply button will create the pipe, which in turn
changes the form to the Pipe
the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form.
Pipe form.
The Select Pipe Specification

The Select Specification section
section of the form includes a
fi
filt
lter
er to al
allo
low
w the
the us
user
er to eaeasi
sily
ly se
sear
arch
ch for
for the
the de
desi
sire
red
d
specification.
Entering
as showncharacters in this section of the form will filter the list



2.7
2.7 Pipe
Pipe Cr
Crea
eatio
tion
n – (W
(Wor
orke
ked
d Ex
Exam
ampl
ple)
e)
The fol
follow
lowing
ing sect
section
ions
s include
include a worked
worked exa
example
mple which
which covers
covers pipe
pipe creation
creation,, branch
branch pos
positi
itionin
oning
g and
connecting
connecting a branch head/tail.
It is usual to create pipe elements in situ to allow referencing of other model elements.
Add EQUI D1201 a

Add EQUI D1201 and
nd :HEATEX
:HEATEX E1302A owned
E1302A owned by
by ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 which
ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 which in turn belongs to
SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to
SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Click the Create
the Create > Create
> Create Pipe
Pipe button
button
to display the Pipe
the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe
form.
Befo
Before
re creat
creatin
ing
g the pi
pipe
pe na
navivigat
gate
e to the
the corre
correct
ct ZONE
using
using the Model Explore
Explorer
r , in this
this ca
case
se ZONE /ZONE-
/ZONE-
PIPING-AREA01..
PIPING-AREA01
Enter the Pipe Name, 80-B-7.

the Pipe Name, 80-B-7.
Select the Primary

Select Primary System for
for the
the pipe to be Process
pipe
System B.
B.
Select the required Pipe

required Pipe Specification A3B
Specification A3B..
Select the Bore to be 80mm and

Select and ente
enterr a Temperature
value of 50
50 DegC.
DegC. Keep the default values for Insulation
Insulation,,
Tracing,, and Slope
Tracing and Slope Ref then
then click the Apply
the Apply button.
button.
The new pipe has been created in ZONE

in ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-
AREA01..
AREA01



2.8
2.8 Pipe
Pipe Br
Bran
anch
ch He
Head
ads
s an
and
d Ta
Tail
ils
s
All branches need to have a start and end point. These can be a position in space (3D co-ordinates), the
flange face of a nozzle, a tee or various other points in the model. Heads and tails are set up via a series of
attributes that belong to the branch element.
The branch head is at the face of Nozzle 1 and the branch tail is at the face of Nozzle 2. The head and tail
can be easily distinguished by the different symbols which can be seen when the connected element is not
in the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
2.8.1
2.8.1 Branc
Branch
h He
Head
ad Attr
ttribu
ibutes
tes
 HPOS
HPOS The
The posi
positi
tion
on in th
the
e zone
one wher
where
e the
the br
bran
anch
ch star
starts
ts..
 HCON
HCON The connec
connectio
tion
n type of the branch
branch end
 HDIR
HDIR The dir
direct
ection
ion in which
which the start
start of
of tthe
he branch
branch is pointi
pointing
ng (lo
(looki
oking
ng down
down the
the bore).
bore).
 HBOR
HBOR The bore
bore of the pipe
pipe (thi
(this
s can be metric
metric or imperi
imperial)
al)..
 HREF
HREF The name
name of
of th
the
e item
item to whic
which
h the
the branc
branch
h head
head is conn
connec
ecte
ted
d (e.
(e.g.
g. /C1
/C110
101-
1-N1)
N1).. If
this is not set, then the branch is open to the atmosphere for a vent or drain.
 HSTU This
This is a refere
reference
nce to the
the cata
catalog
logue,
ue, whic
which
h de
determi
termines
nes the materia
materiall of the first
first piece
piece
of pipe, between the start of the branch and the first fitting (this still needs to be set, even if
there is a fitting connected directly to the head).
2.
2.8.
8.2
2 Bran
Branch
ch Ta
Tail
il Att
ttrib
ribut
utes
es
 TPOS The positi

position
on in the zone
zone where
where the branch
branch ends
ends..
 TCON
TCON The conn
connec
ecti
tion
on ty
type
pe of th
the
e br
bran
anch
ch end
end
 TDIR
TDIR Th
The
e di
dire
rect
ctio
ion
n in whic
which
h th
the
e end
end of the
the br
bran
anch
ch is po
poin
inti
ting
ng (l
(loo
ooki
king
ng ba
back
ck do
dow
wn
the bore).
 TBOR The bore

bore of the pipe
pipe (thi
(this
s can be metric
metric or imperi
imperial)
al)..
 TREF The name of the ite

item
m to which
which the bran
branch
ch tail
tail is con
connect
nected
ed (e.g.
(e.g. /150-A-3
/150-A-3).
). IIff this
this iis
s
not set, then the branch is open to the atmosphere for a vent or drain.
 It is no
nott nec
neces
essa
sary
ry to sp
spec
ecif
ify
y ea
each
ch of th
thes
ese
e at
attri
tribu
bute
tes
s ev
ever
ery
y ti
time
me a br
bran
anch
ch is cr
crea
eate
ted.
d. On mos
most
t
occasions when a branch head or tail is defined, it will be connected to another pipe or to a nozzle. The
act of connect
connecting
ing to another item sets the branch head/ta
head/tailil attributes automatically.
automatically.



2.9 Modify Pip

ipe
e Form
In AVEVA E3D terms a pipe is an administration element. The branch element holds the geometric data.
On clicki
clicking
ng the Apply button
button on the Pipe Edi
Editor:
tor:
Create
Cre Pipe form
ate Pipe form thethe Pipe
Pipe Editor:
Editor: Modify
Modify Pipe
Pipe
for
form
m is automa
automaticticall
ally
y display
displayeded so that
that the bra
branch
nch
head and tail can be specified.
The
nameup
uppe
perrspecification.
and secti
section
on of the
the form
form di
disp
splay
lays
s the
the pipe
pipe
There is also a list of existing branches containing

the reference names for head and tail connections.
 At present the head and tail entries

entries are blank
because the branch has not been connected.
The lo
lowe
werr sect
sectio
ion
n of the
the form
form show
shows
s the
the Branch
Head and Branc
Branchh Tail
Tail tabs
tabs.. Th
Thes
esee al
allo
low
w the
the
positioning,
positi
at
attr
trib oning,
ibut
utes foconnecti
es forconnection
r the
the heonadand
head ansetting
and
d tail of various
tail of variou
the s lect
the sele
se other
cted
ed
branch.
It can be considered that there are two methods of

doing this:-
 Explicitly
Explicitly – by enterin
entering
g the data
data manually.
manually.
 Connec
Connectin
ting
g – by connect
connecting
ing to an existin
existing
g
pipe or equipment nozzle the values are set
automatically.



2.10
2.10 Upda
Updatin
ting
g Pi
Pipe
pe & Br
Bran
anch
ch Da
Data
ta
Modify Pipe Attri

Attributes
butes
Modify Branch Attributes
Clicking the Modify
the Modify Pipe Attributes
Attributes or
or the Modify
the Modify Branch Attributes
Attributes button
button will change the form allowing
modification of the pipe or branch attributes
modification attributes respectively.
respectively.



2.11
2.11 Pipe
Pipe Br
Branc
anch
h He
Head/
ad/Ta
Tail
il Pos
Positio
itioned
ned Exp
Explic
licitly
itly
The explicit definition method involves the use of the tab below the List
the List of Connections fold-up
Connections fold-up panel.
When setting the branch head or tail explicitly, each of

the previously described branch attributes needs to be
specified.
Bore: Nominal Bore size of the pipe. The options list
contains all sizes available in the current specification.

Connection: select
Connection: select from the options list of the available
head/tail connection types.
Direction: - the head direction is with the flow and the

Direction: -
tail direction
direction is against
against the flow.
The Pick Position

The Pick Position button
button can be used to graphically set
the head/ta
head/tail
il positio
position
n using
using the Positioning
Positioning Control
toolbar. This is with respect to the World.
Position: Positio
Position
n in world
world co-ord
co-ordina
inates.
tes. This can be
expressed in ENU or XYZ format.
By default
default setting
setting the initia
initiall positi
position
on for the head
head will
will
result in the tail also being positioned and vice versa.
The position of the tail is in relation to that of the head.
 The Cre
Create
ate Hea
Head
d Com
Compon
ponent
ents
s che
checkb
ckbox
ox is onl
only
y
relevant
relevant whe
when
n con
connec
nectin
ting
g the Hea
Head/Ta
d/Tail
il to othe
other
r
elements.
 The automatic positioning of the opposing end of

the branch will allow immediate use of the Quick
Pipe Router if required, see Chapter 5 for details.



2.12
2.12 Pipe
Pipe Bran
Branch
ch He
Head/
ad/Ta
Tail
il Con
Connec
nected
ted – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exam
Example
ple))
With the
the Branch Head
Head tab selected click the Pick
Connection button.
Connection button.
The prompt ‘Identify

‘Identify element to connect to:’
to:’ is displayed.
In thi
this
s example
example the head connectio
connection
n wil
willl be connect
connected
ed to
Nozzle N2
Nozzle N2 of
of :HEATEX
:HEATEX E1302A.
E1302A.
Indicate the EQUI
the EQUI as
as shown:-
 In thi
this
s exa
example
mple the Noz
Nozzle
zle is del
delibe
iberate
rately
ly avoi
avoided
ded to
demonstrate alternative behavior.
This will result in the name of the EQUI being added to the
fo
form
rm an
andd th
the
e List
List of Connec
Connection
tionss fold-u
fold-up
p panel
panel being
being
populated with the nozzle connections and their availability
from the EQUI
the EQUI..
Ensure the Create
the Create Head Components checkbox
Components checkbox is checked
select N2 from the list and click the
at the bottom of the form, select N2
Connec
Connectt To Select
Selected
ed button.
button.
The List
The List of Connections fold-up
Connections fold-up panel closes and the new
values can be seen on the lower section of the form.
Similarly
Similarly to the explicit positioning
positioning method, the positioning of
the head will have automatically resulted in the tail position
being defined. However
However for the purposes of this worked
example the tail will also be updated.



Repeat the connection procedure for the Branch

the Branch Tail tab.
Tail tab. Once
the Create Tail Components
again ensure the Create Components checkbox
checkbox has been
checked. Click the Pick
the Pick Connection button
Connection button as shown before.
In this example the tail connection will be connected to nozzle

N1 of
N1 of EQUI
EQUI D1201.
D1201.
This time indicate the actual nozzle as shown:-
Because
Because the unconnec
unconnected
ted nozzle
nozzle was
was ind
indica
icated
ted directly
directly the
connection is made automatically.
The List
values canofbeConnect
Conn
seenections
onions fold-u
fold-up
the lower p panel
paneof
section l closes
clo
theses and the new
form.
Savework
In this case the head and tail connections are in line resulting in
the route fro
from
m head
head to tai
taill being
being geometr
geometrica
ically
lly correc
correct.
t. When
the route of the branch is geometrically correct the implied tube
will be created
created..
The use of the Create

the Create Head / Tail Components
Components checkbox
checkbox has
resulted in compatible flanges and gaskets being automatically
being added at the connection to the EQUI.
 The inclusion
inclusion of the implie
implied
d tube immediately
immediately after creating
the con
the conne
necti
ction
ons
s is no
nott nor
norma
mall
lly
y the ca
case
se.. Usua
Usuall
lly
y th
the
e
bran
branch
ch req
requir
uires
es so
some
me fo
form
rm of mo
modif
dific
icat
atio
ion
n in orde
orderr to
make the implied tube appear.
 Whe
When
n us
usin
ing
g the Pick Connec
Connection
tion method
method for head
head/tai
/tail l
creation it is not necessary to click the Apply button.
button. This
is because the information is committed to the database
when the Connect
the Connect To Selected button
button is clicked.



2.13
2.13 Modi
Modify
fy Pi
Pipe
pe Fo
Form
rm - co
cont
ntinu
inued
ed
The other buttons on the form are:-
Pipe –
Set Working Pipe – allows navigation
to an alternative pipe and update the
form to suit.
Create New Branch

Branch –
– creates a new
branch belonging to the current pipe.
Autoroute Branch –
Branch – routes the
branch between the existing
existing
components or head/tail connection is
no components are present using
defaultt selections from the
defaul
specification.
Create Component
Component – – This opens the
Piping Component Editor form form to
allow the creation,
creation, modific
modification
ation and
reselection of piping components.
Disconnect –
Disconnect – disconnects the
head/tail from the current connection.
Reconnect –
Reconnect – reconnects the head/tail
to a connection that has changed
position in the model.
Data – This is used for laser
Laser Data –
data and is not the subject of this
training course.
Connec
Connectt To First/L
First/Last
ast Member – –
repositions
reposi tions the head/tail
head/tail to the first/last
member in the branch. This is used for
modification when the head/tail is not
connected to another pipe or nozzle.
This also sets the Connection
the Connection Type to
Type to
that of first/l
first/last
ast member.
Direction –
Reverse Direction – reverses the
current direction for the Head/Tail.
Offset –
Offset – changes the format of the
position text boxes to allow offset
(delta values) to be enterred.
Nudge – This allows the user to
Nudge –
reposition
reposition the Head/Tail
Head/Tail along the
centreline using the incremental value
enterred in the text box. It is intended
for use with laser data but can also be
applied to an explicit position.
Las
Laserer Pick Hea
Head/Ta
d/Tail
il - Th
This
is is us
used
ed
for laser data and is not the subject of
this training course.



2.14
2.14 Navig
Navigati
ating
ng Pip
Pipes
es and Br
Branc
anches
hes
If there is a requirement to modify the pipe or branch once it has been created, select the pipe in the 3D
View or
View or from the Model
the Model Explorer and
and then from the
the Modify group the Modify Pipe button
Modify group click the Modify Pipe button to display
the Pipe
the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form.
Pipe form.
Alternatively, if the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form is already open navigate to the pipe and click the Set
Working Pipe
Pipe button on the form. Allowing the navigation between pipes without having to close the form
and reopen it each time
The
The for
form di disp
spla
lay
ys the
the exi
existin
sting
g bran
branch
ches
es own
owned by the the pi
pipe
pe in the
the
Connectivity table. Highlighting the branch which requires modifying in this
table will display the head and tail details and connection information on the
relevant tab. The selected branch will also be highlighted in the 3D View
Branch B1
selected for
for
modification.



Branch B2
selected for
modification.
Branch button.
The form is also used to create a new branch by clicking the Create New Branch button. The head and tail
position for the new branch can now be defined.
The new branch can now be seen

in the Model
the Model Explorer .
If the Modify
the Modify > Modify
> Modify Pipe
Pipe or Set
Set Working Pipe
Pipe button
button is clicked and the Current Element is
Element is not a valid
pipe, branch or component then a warning will be displayed.



Exercise 1 – Create Pipes Head/Tail
Perform the following tasks. In both cases uncheck the Create Head/Tail Components checkboxes.
Components checkboxes.
Create Pipe /200-B-4

/200-B-4 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-
/ZONE-PIPING-
AREA01 using
AREA01 using the following information:-
 Pr
Prim
imar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process
System B.
B.
 Specification = A3B
 Bore = 200mm
 Temperature = 50
 He
Hea
ad con
connect
necte
ed to noz
ozz
zle EQUI
/C1101/N3
 TTaail connected to nozzle EQUI

/E1301/N1..
/E1301/N1
Create Pipe
Create
AREA01 Pipe /150-A-57
/150-A-57 below
using
AREA01 using below ZONE
the following ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-
information:-
 Pr
Prim
imar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process
System A.
A.
 Specification = A1A
 Bore = 150mm
 Temperature = 50
 Insulation = 50mm_FibreGlass
 Head is Open
is Open End W
End W 303000
303000 N N 308530
U 104965 with
104965 with a Direction of W
W
 Tail connect
connected
ed to nozzle
nozzle :PUMP
:PUMP
P1502B/N1..
P1502B/N1
 Savework
Practice
Practice navigating between the different
different pipes and
branches.


CHAPTER 3
3 Componen
Componentt Creatio
Creation
n and
and Modifi
Modificatio
cation
n
3.1
3.1 Pipe
Pipe Br
Bran
anch
ch Co
Comp
mpon
onen
ents
ts (P
(Pipe
ipe Fi
Fitt
ttin
ings
gs))
When a branch
a straight head and
line between thetail is initially
head and taildefined, theThis
positions. branch
willwill consist
appear as aofdotted
a single section
line of pipe
between running
the two in
points
unless the head and tail are aligned along a common axis and have the same bore. The presence of the
dotted line indicates that the branch route is incorrectly defined.
The next step in designing a pipe is to create and position a series of fittings, which define the pipe route
required. It is necessary to decide which piping components are needed in order to satisfy the requirements
of the process. The components must be arranged so that the pipe meets the design requirements. It is not
necessary to know the dimensions of fittings as AVEVA E3D derives these automatically from the catalogue.
To create
create component
components, s, fir
first
st select
select an ite
item
m fro
from
m the list of fittin
fittings
gs ava
availa
ilable
ble from the associate
associatedd piping
piping
specificati
specif ication.
on. Typi
T ypical
cal fitting types are Elbows, Tees, Reducers,
Reducers, Flanges, Gaskets and Valves
Valves.. There is some
intelligence built into the AVEVA E3D forms so that by placing, for example a valve, the associated Gaskets
and Flanges will also be created.
For all piping components, the following steps will need to be performed:-
 Select the
the component
component from the piping
piping specific
specification.
ation.
 Position
Position the component
component and
and set the
the orientation.
orientation.
The Tube does not have to be created explicitly; it is created automatically and implied between adjacent
fittings.



3.
3.2
2 Arr
rriv
ive
e an
and
d Le
Leav
ave
e Po
Poin
ints
ts
Piping components have P–points (similar to those for equipment primitives). The significance of P–points is
two–fold. Firstly, they define the connection points, and secondly, they determine the branch flow through
the component by means of Arrive and Leave attributes.
For the reducer shown below, the large bore is at P1 and the small bore is at P2. If this component is used
to increase the bore of the branch, the flow in the direction of the branch will be from P2 to P1. In order to tell
AVEVA E3D the necessary flow direction, there are two numeric attributes, Arrive and Leave, which must be
set to the p–point numbers required. In this case, Arrive would be set to 2 and Leave would be set to 1. (The
default is Arrive 1 Leave 2). Forms and menus within AVEVA E3D will handle all connections; however it is
important
importa nt to understand
understand the concepts
concepts behind the connections.
connections.



3.
3.3
3 Pipin
Piping
g Co
Comp
mpon
onen
entt Ed
Edit
itor
or Fo
Form
rm - Cr
Crea
eatio
tion
n
In the
the Create group click the Create Component button to display the
Piping Component Editor form. form.
Alternatively, if the Modif

Modify
y Pi
Pipe
pe for
form is op
open
en clic
click
k the
the Create
Component button
Component button
The Piping
The Piping Component Editor form
form now appears.
This form is used extensively during pipe creation. As

implied by the name of the form it is not only restricted
to th
the
e cr
creat
eatio
ion
n of the
the compo
componenent
nts,
s, but
but al
also
so for
for the
the
modification and reselection as well.
The upper
upper secti
section
on of the
the form
form re
rela
late
tes
s to the
the gene
general
ral
bran
branch
ch ininfo
form
rmat
atio
ion
n su
suchch as Specification,
Specification, Bore,
Bore,
Insulation and
Insulation and Tracing
Tracing..
The next section of the form consists of two tabs. The

Standard Components
Components tab displays the 14 commonly
used component buttons. This is supplemented by the
Additional
Additi onal Components
Components tab.The
tab.The selec
selectio
tion
n of one of
these buttons will make the Select tab
Select tab active to further
filter the selection.
In addition to the Select

Select tab there are also the
the Modify,
Modify,
Reselect and
Reselect and Errors
Errors tabs.
tabs. The use of these tabs will be
covered later in this guide.
The appearance of the area below the sType

the sType list
list varies
depending on the type of component being added.
The
The lower
ower se
sect
ctio
ion
n of the
the for
form is co
comm
mmon
on for
for all
component types:-
 Create Mode
Mode section determines whether
the compo
mponents are created in the
direction of flow or against flow.
 Create Components
Components section determi
determines
nes
whether the components are connected to
the current component or inserted.
inserted.
 The A
Auto
uto Cre
Create
ate check
checkbo
boxx is mai
mainly
nly
used
use d to deter
determin
mine
e whwheth
ether
er conn
connec
ectin
ting
g
flanges and gaskets are to be added, i.e.
when creating flanges or valves.
valves.
 The Skip
The Skip Connected Comps
Comps checkbox
checkbox is
used if the Current
the Current Element is
Element is connected
to other components. With this checkbox
checked the component will be created at
the next free connection, i.e. where there
is implied tube.
 The default value

value for these checkboxes can be determined
determined by the Piping
the Piping Settings form
Settings form see Appendix
A.1.4 for further details
The bottom of the form is occupied by the Component

the Component Sequence List.
List.



3.3.1 Selecting
Selecting from an Alt
Alterna
ernative
tive Spec
Specifica
ification
tion
Components can be selected from an alternative

specification if required using the options list as shown.
The selection of an alternative specification is indicated

on the form as a warning.
When an alternative specification is being used and the

component is of a specific type, i.e. flange, valve, etc.
the Select adjacent out of spec checkbox become
becomes s
active.
Chec
Checkin
king
g this
this chec
checkbo
kbox x will
will re
resul
sultt in the
the adjac
adjacen
entt
component
compon entss also
also being
being select
selected
ed from the alt
altern
ernativ
ative
e
specification if available.
 The de
defau
fault
lt va
valu
lue
e fo
forr the
these
se ch
chec
eckb
kbox
oxes
es ca
can
n be
dete
determi
rmined
ned by ththee Piping
Piping Sett
Settings
ings form
form se
see
e
Appendix A.1.4 for further details
To revert back to the origina

originall specification
specification click the
Reset Specification
Specification link
link label or reselect it from the
options list as before.



3.4 Piping
Piping Co
Compo
mponen
nentt Edi
Editor
tor For
Form
m – Cr
Creat
eation
ion – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Ex
Exam
ample
ple))
This worked example will cover the creation of firstly flanges and gaskets at the head and tail of PIPE
PIPE /200
B-4 created in the previous exercise and then some elbows.
B-4 created
Navigate to BRAN
to BRAN 200-B-4/B1 in
200-B-4/B1 in the Model
 Whe
When
n ad
addi
ding
ng fl
flang
anges
es to he
head
ad or tai
taill th
the
e br
bran
anch
ch mu
must
st be th
the
e
current element.
Click the Create
the Create > Create
> Create Componen
Componentt button to display the Piping
the Piping
Component Editor form.
form.
Components are created by selecting the required fitting type button, in

the Flange,, which in turn influences the appearance of the
this case the Flange
lower section of the form.
Once th
Once thee fi
fitt
ttin
ing
g type
type has
has be
been
en sel
selec
ecte
ted
d a list
list of avai
availa
lable
ble
STypes will
STypes will be displayed on the Select
the Select tab.
tab.
The Piping
Piping Component
Component Editor formform shows
shows detail
details
s of all the
sTypes available
sTypes available in the specification. i.e. a slip-on flange, weld
neck, etc.
order, With Flow or

The items are created in order, With Flow or Against
Against Flow.
Flow . As
the button is selected the branch toggles between the head/tail
position.
At Head - With Flow direction.
At Tail - Against Flow direction



Select the required flange from the sType

the sType list, WN,, click the With
list, WN the With Flow
Flow button,
button, check the Auto.
the Auto. Create
Create and
Comps. checkboxes and click the Connect
Skip Connected Comps. the Connect button.
button. The new flange complete with gasket
will be added to the branch. Appearing in both the 3D View and
View and Model
Model Explorer .
Now add a W N flange and

gasket to the tail of the pipe:
Ensu
Ensure
re tha
thatt the br
bran
anch
ch lelevel
vel is
se
sele
lect
cted
ed in thethe hihier
era
arc
rchy
hy to
achieve the correct result.
Using the Component Sequence List navigate

List navigate to the flange at
the head of the branch.
the Elbow button
Click the Elbow button on the form.
Select the EL90
the EL90 from
from the sType
the sType list.
list.
When adding an elbow it is also possible to specify the Angle

Angle b
by
y
ente
enteri
ring
ng th
the
e de
degr
gree
ees
s value
value.. This
This valu
value
e has
has to be withi
within
n the
the
Min//Max
Min Max value
value specified.
 This Min/Max
Min/Max value is set in the specification
specification..
In this case the default value of 90

of 90 is valid.
Click the
the With
With Flow
Flow button
button followed by the Connect
the Connect..
The elbow is connected to the

flange as shown.



With the previo

previously
usly create
created
d elbow
elbow selecte
selectedd crea
create
te a second
second
the With Flow
elbow, ensuring that the With Flow button
button is selected.
Navigate to the flange at the tail of the branch and create a

the Against Flow
third elbow, ensuring that the Against Flow button
button has been
clicked.
These elbows require modification

modification because
because the orientation is
not correct to suit the desired route.
Th
The
e ne
new w el
elem
emen ents
ts can
can be seen
seen in the
the
Mode
Mo dell Expl
Explor
orer
er and Component
Sequence List respectively.
List respectively.
Savework
Savework..



3.5
3.5 Comp
Compon
onen
entt Se
Sequ
quen
ence
ce Li
List
st
The Component
Component Sequenc
Sequence e List is an ord
order
ered
ed list
list of compo
compone
nent
nts
s for the
the curr
curren
entt branch
branch of the
the CE.
CE. It
provides an alternative method of navigating to the components within the branch whilst maintaining focus
on the Piping
the Piping Component Editor form.
form.
The CE is
The CE is in the centre of the Component Sequence
List and
List and is highlighted as shown. This is also reflected
in the Model Explorer and
Explorer and the 3D View in the usual
manner.
 The Component
Component Sequenc
Sequence
e List
List will
will als
also
o tra
track
ck
the CE
CE shou
should
ld a se sele
lecti
ction
on be ma
made
de fro
from
m th
the
e
Model Explorer or 3D
or 3D View .
The adjace
adjacent
nt compone
components nts in the branch
branch are shown
shown
both sides of the
the CE,
CE, unless first or last component is
se
sele
lect
cted.
ed. To navi
navigagate
te to an al alter
terna
nati
tive
ve compo
compone nent
nt
select
select it from the list
list or alterna
alternativ
tively the Select
ely click the
Previous or Select
Select Nex Nextt button
buttons.s. Cli
Clickin
cking
g the
these
se
butt
button
onss from
from the
the branc
branchh le
leve
vell will
will navig
navigat
ate
e to the
the
previous or next branch respectively.
Clicking the Select

the Select
Component buttons
Component First
buttons will Component
Component or or component
navigate to the Select Lastat
Select
the Head or Tail respectively (Forwards
(Forwards mode).
mode).
If the CE
the CE is
is close to the head or tail of the branch the
Component
Compone nt Sequence List will the Select
List will display the Select
Branch buttons.
Branch buttons. This will navigate to the branch level
in the Model
The Compone
Component
nt Sequen
Sequence ce List
List is in
infl
flue
uenc
nced
ed by
Forwards//Backwards directi
Forwards direction
on mode
mode.. Switch
Switching
ing to
Backwards mode
mode will
will rever
reverse
se the
the sequ
sequen
ence
ce of the
the
components as shown.
 Care needs
needs to be taken when using
using the Select
the Select tab
tab as it is possible for the Component Sequence List
to show components that do not belong to the branch named at the top of the form. In this scenario the
buttons in the
the Standard Components and
Components and Additional
Additional Components tabs
Components tabs of the form will be inactive.



3.6
3.6 Pipin
Piping
g Co
Comp
mpon
onen
entt Ed
Edit
itor
or Fo
Form
rm – Mo
Modi
difi
fica
cati
tion
on
The Piping Component Editor

Editor form promotes the workflow of creation and modification from the same
form maintaining focus in a single area of the application.
 Retro
Retrospectiv
spective
e modification
modification can also be perfo
performed
rmed using the Editor
the Editor , refer to Chapter 5.
The Modify
Modify tab differs to the Select
Select tab
tab in that it is
not
not ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary y to ususe the Set Wor
e the Worki king
ng BrBranc
anch h
button to update the form to the current branch or
compone
comp onent.
nt. The for
form
m tracks
tracks the curren
currentt ele
element
ment
all
allowi
owing
ng the selecti
selection
on of any pipe compone
component nt for
which the user has write access for modification.
The Modify
The Modify tab
tab has five main sections:-

P
Po
ositio
tioni
ning
ng & Fre
req
quent
ently Use
sed
d
Functions
 Rotation & Direction tool
 Orientation Functions
 Other Functions
 Component Sequence List



3.6.1
3.6.1 Forward
Forwards
s / Ba
Back
ckward
wards
s Mod
Mode
e
When the
the Modify
Modify tab is selected a button becomes
active which determines
determines whether
whether the modifi
m odificatio
cations
ns
are applied in Forwards
Forwards or
or Backwards
Backwards mode. This
button is a toggle which shows the current mode that
is being used.
 Not all of the Modify

Modify functions are affected by
the Forwards/Backwards mode.
mode. Thi
This
s wi
will
ll be
clearly
clearl y stated in the relevant sections
In
In Forwards
Forwards mode
mode the functions are
performed with the direction of flow. The
modification
modifica tion axes are positioned
positioned at the
arrive of the component.
In Backwards mode
mode th the
e fu
func
ncti
tion
ons
s arare
e
perfo
performe
rmedd ag
agai
ains
nstt th
the
e direc
directi
tion
on of flow
flow..
The modification axes are positioned at the
leave of the component.
 This often has the result of reversing

the meaning of the function, i.e. Next
becomes Previous
becomes Previous and
and vice versa.
The mode currently being used can be determined by which button is visible. This mode will be set until it is
changed.
 The following
following sections
sections will use the Forwards
the Forwards direction
direction mode only unless otherwise stated.



3.6.2
3.6.2 Positio
Positionin
ning
g & Fre
Freque
quent
ntly
ly Us
Used
ed Fun
Functi
ctions
ons
Branch Head
Previous Component
Align with Previous
Next Component
Branch Tail
Cursor Pick
Distance
Distance From Previous
Previous (toggle)
(toggle)
Tube Length from Previous (toggle)

Previous (toggle)
Component (frequent
Copy Component (frequent use)
Connect To Previou
Connect Previous
s (frequent use)
 The following explanations

explanations will assume that the Forwards direction mode has been selected unless
stated otherwise.
The Positioning functions
The Positioning functions use a constrained centreline from the previous or next component to position the
compo
componenent
nt bein
being
g modif
modifie
ied.
d. The us
usee of th
the
e pr
previ
eviou
ouss or next
next compo
compone
nent
nt from
from whic
whichh the cons
constr
trai
ained
ned
centreline is applied is dependent on the Forwards
Forwards or
or Backwards
Backwards mode
mode respectively. The component will
be positioned so that the origin is along the constrained centreline. The orientation of the component is not
altered when using the Positioning
the Positioning functions.
functions.
 The following
following illustrat
illustration
ions
s do not depi
depict
ct the bes
bestt eng
engine
ineerin
ering
g usa
usage
ge of the
these
se fun
functi
ctions.
ons. Instead
Instead they
have been deliberately designed to show similar scenarios that allow the trainee to see the before and
after situation. This allows the trainee to compare the before and after situation in order to understand
exactly how the function can be used. The practical usage of these functions will become clearer during
the forthcoming worked examples and exercises.


3.6.2.1
3.6.2.1 Positi
Position
on Through
Through - Branc
Branch
h Head/Tail
Head/Tail
In Forwards directi
direction
on mod
modee a constr
constraine
ained
d centrel
centreline
ine is used
used from the previous
previous component
component thr
throug
ough
h the
orig
originin of th
the
e compo
compone nent
nt bein
being
g modif
modifie
ied.
d. The compo
compone nent
nt is then
then po
posi
siti
tion
oned
ed throu
through
gh the
the hehead
ad/ta
/tail
il
respectively.
Branch Head
Branch Tail
 These functions
functions are influenced
influenced by Forwards/Backwards direction
Forwards/Backwards direction mode.
.


3.6.2.2
3.6.2.2 Positi
Position
on Through
Through - Previous/N
Previous/Next
ext Componen
Componentt
In Forwards directi
direction
on mod
modee a constr
constraine
ainedd centrel
centreline
ine is used
previous component
component thr
throug
oughh the
orig
originin of th
the
e compo
compone nent
nt be
bein
ing
g modif
modifie
ied.
d. The co
compo
mponenent
nt is the
then
n po
posi
siti
tion
oned
ed thro
through
ugh the
the ori
origi
gin
n of the
Previous/Next component respectively.
Previous
Component
Next Component
 These functions


3.6.2.3
3.6.2.3 Positi
Position
on Through
Through - Align
Align with Prev
Previous
ious
In Forwards directi
direction
on mod
modee a constr
constraine
ained
d centrel
centreline
ine is used
previous component
component thr
throug
ough
h the
ori
origin
gin of the component
component being modifie
modified.
d. The compon
componentent is then position
positioned
ed through
through its own ori
origin
gin which
which
results in it being aligned with the Previous component.
Alig
Align
n with Previous
 This function
function is influenced
Forwards/Backwards direction mode


3.6.2.4
3.6.2.4 Positi
Position
on Through
Through - Cursor
Cursor Pick
Pick
In Forwards directi
direction
on mod
mode
e a constr
constraine
ained
d centrel
centreline
ine is used
previous component
component thr
throug
ough
h the
origin of the component being modified. The component is then positioned through the cursor pick indicated.
Cursor Pick
This will invoke the Positioning

the Positioning Control form.
Control form.
In the illustration below the tee is positioned through

the nozzle of the pump.
 This function


If the direction of the constrained centerline is not orthogonal, as is the case for the 45 degree elbow shown
below,, the Position
below the Position Through form
Through form is displayed.
The Position
The Position Through form
Through form allows the selection of the possible planes.
The first plane selection will position the component

through one of the orthogonal planes, at the picked
position. In this case the East plane.


The second plane selection will position the

component through the other orthogonal plane, at the
picked position. In this case the North plane.
Th
The
e fourthrth plane
ane selec ecttion willill posisiti
tio
on ththe
e
compo
componenent
nt th
throu
rough
gh a plane
plane perpen
perpendi dicul
cular
ar to the
constra
constraine
ined
d centerli
centerline.
ne. Effecti
Effectively
vely positi
positioni
oning
ng the
compo
componenent
nt at the clos
closes
estt po
posi
siti
tion
on to the pi picke
cked
d
position.


3.6.2.5
3.6.2.5 Positi
Position
on Using Distance
Distance From Previous/T
Previous/Tube
ube Length From Previous
Previous
These functi
These functions
ons allow the pos
positi
itioni
oning
ng of the current
current compone
component
nt using
using a distanc
distance
e val
value
ue ente
entered
red int
into
o the
textbo
textbox.
x. This dista
distance
nce wi
will
ll eit
either
her be int
interp
erprete
reted
d as the dis
distanc
tance
e betw
between
een the ori
origin
gins,
s, or the tube length
length
between the leave of the previous to the arrive of the component being modified. The button on the form is a
toggle showing the current setting.
setting.
Distance From Previous Tube Length From Previous
The elbow is positioned so that there is a distance of Th

Thee el
elbo
boww is po
posi
siti
tion
oned
ed so that
that ther
there
e is a tube
tube
750mm between the origins.
origins. length of 750mm.
 These functions
3.6.2.6
3.6.2.6 Copy Compo
Component
nent
This allows the current component to be copied, creating a new component by connecting it to the current
component.
Copy Component
 This function


3.6.2.7
3.6.2.7 Conne
Connect
ct To Prev
Previous
ious
This connects the current component directly to the previous component (Forwards
( Forwards mode).
mode).
Connectt To Previou
Connec Previous
s
If this function is applied to a group of connected

components as shown below, then an option to
move all of the selected components is displayed.
Clicking the Yes button

Clicking button will
will resul
resultt in al
alll selec
selecte
ted d
components, in this case the flanges, gaskets, valve
and elbowl; being repositioned to connect the the CE
CE to
the previous component.
 This function


3.6.3
3.6.3 Rotati
Rotation
on and Dir
Direc
ection
tion Too
Tools
ls
 These functions
influenced by Forwards /
Forwards / Backwards direction
Backwards direction mode
3.6.3.1
3.6.3.1 Direc
Direction
tion Tool
The Direction tool
The Direction tool allows the indication one of the six axes to set
the direction of component. For example the direction of an elbow
can be set to Up
to Up as
as shown.
This will set the value in the Direction

the Direction textbox.
textbox. Alternatively the
value can be entered directly into the textbox.
The default orientation for the current form can be changed from
the right click menu. How
Howeveeverr if the form is ini
initia
tialise
lised
d again
again the
orientation will be reset to the default.
 To
To pe
perm
rman
anen
entl
tly
y se
sett th
the
e de
defa
faul
ultt or
orie
ient
ntat
atio
ion
n th
the
e Piping
Settings form
Settings form needs to be used, see Appendix A.5.
Clicking one of the planes will change the appearance of the tool allowing a more specific direction to be
selected. The result of this does depend upon the original orientation of the component.
To re
retu
turn
rn to th
the
e de
defa
faul
ultt di
direc
recti
tion
onal
al ap
appea
peararanc
nce,
e, to alallo
low
w the
the
select
selection
ion of another
another plane
plane click Defaultt Direction
click the Defaul Direction button
button or
the Escape key.
press the Escape key.


 These directions can also be influenced by the slope of the Branch. This is covered in Chapter 6.
3.6.3.
3.6.3.2
2 Rot
Rotatio
ation
n Too
Tooll
To acaccecess
ss the
the Rotation tool
the Rotate Compone
click on the Rotate Component nt
button
but ton.. This
This all
allows
ows the rotatio
rotationn
of the component to be
modified.
The appe
appear
aran
ance
ce of the
the too
tooll is
depe
depend
nden
entt upon
upon the
the type
type of
comp
mpoonent that has been
selected.
When
Whe n th
the
e to
tool
ol is acti
activa
vated
ted an ai
aid
d is added
added to the 3D View which
shows the angle values. These are always incremental angles with 0
degrees being the starting position of the component.


Positioning the cursor over the angle selection on the form will result in the arc of rotation being included in
the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
Clicking the angle will modify the component as shown.
The Rotation tool
The Rotation tool can also be applied to other component types. The
appearance of the gadget will change depending upon the object
being rotated as shown here for a valve.
The Direction functions first orientate the component. This orientation is performed before the direction of
the leave (Forwards
(Forwards)) or arrive (Backwards
(Backwards)) is changed.
changed. The positi
positionon of the component
component is not altered.
altered.
Consequently the Direction
the Direction functions
functions might have unexpect
unexpected
ed results if:-
 The arrive of the component

component iis
s not orientated
orientated to the leave of the previous
previous in Forwards
in Forwards mode.
mode.
 The leave of the component

component is not orientate
orientated
d to the arrive
arrive of the next in
in Backwards
Backwards mode.
mode.
The above situations are usually instantly recognisable because there will be no implied tube at the arrive or
leave.
 The orientate function is detail

detailed
ed in section 3.6.4.4.


3.6.3
3.6.3.3
.3 Rotat
Rotation
ion Tool
Tool with Flange
Flanged
d Component
Components
s
For flan
flange
gedd compo
componenent
nts
s the
the
Rotation tool
tool us
uses
es the
the bo
bolt
lt
hole positions to determine the
angles by default. In this case
there are 12 holes in the
flange allowing rotations of 30
degree increments.
In thi
hiss case the
the valve has
be
been
en rot
rotat
ated
ed but the
the flan
flange
gess
have
have remaine
remainedd in the ori
origin
ginal
al
positi
position.
on. The valve
valve rota
rotatio
tion
n is
con
constr
straine
ned
d to the angle
dete
determ
rmin
ined
ed by the
positions. the bo
bolt
lt hole
hole
To turn off the constrained bolt

the Change
hole rotation, click the Change
To DeDefa
fault
ult Angl
nglee button
button as
shown. The appearance of the
bu
butt
tton
on ha
hass chan
changed
ged to shoshow
w
the mode being used.
Selecting a rotation that does not align with the bolt hole spacing will result in the associated flanges being
highlighted and a Question
highlighted Question form
form appearing. Clicking the Yes
the Yes button will also rotate the flanges while clicking
the No
No button will maintain the original flange rotations resulting in the flange bolt holes being misaligned
with those of the valve.


 Should any misalignment

misalignment between
between the bolt holes need to rectifi
rectified
ed the Connect
the Connect to Previous button
Previous button can
be used, see section 3.6.2.7 for further details.
To return to the Direction
the Direction tool
tool
click on the Direct
the Direct
Component button.
Component button.
3.6.
3.6.4
4 Orie
Orient
ntat
atio
ion
n Fu
Func
ncti
tion
ons
s
Direction
Direction To Next
Direction To Pick
Direction
Direction To Head
Direction To Tail
Orientate Component
Flip Componen
Componentt
Align Selection/Component
Direct Selection/Component
 The following explanations

explanations will assume that the Forwards direction mode has been selected unless
stated otherwise.


3.6.4
3.6.4.1
.1 Direc
Direction
tion To Next
This function allows the direction of the current component towards the origin of the next, whilst orientating
the component so that the opposing
opposing connection direction suits the adjacent
adjacent component.
component.
In
In Forwards
Forwards mode the Direction To Next
mode the Direction Next button
button orientates the arrive of
the component to suit the leave of the previous and then directs the
leave of the elbow to the origin of the next.
 These functions
3.6.4.2
3.6.4.2 Direc
Direction
tion to Pick
This function
function all
allows
ows the directi
direction
on of the current
current comp
compone
onent
nt tow
toward
ards
s a picked
picked positi
position.
on. If app
applic
licabl
able
e the
orientation
orientation will also take place.
In
In Forwards mode the Direction To Pick button orientates the arrive
of the component to suit the leave of the previous and then directs the
component to picked position.
This will invoke the Positioning

the Positioning Control
form.
In the illustration below the tee is directed

towards the nozzle of the EQUI.


 These functions
3.6.4.3
3.6.4.3 Direc
Direction
tion To Head
Head/Tail
/Tail
These functions allow the direction of the current component towards the head/tail position of the branch.
Usually Direction
Usually Direction To Tail
Tail is
is used in Forwards
in Forwards mode
mode to direct the leave connection and Direction
and Direction To Head
is used in Backwards
in Backwards mode
mode to direct the arrive connection.
Scenario:-
Scenari o:- The elbow
elbow has been created
created and positioned
positioned in relation
relation to
tai
taill of the branch
branch which
which has a non-ort
non-orthog
hognal direction.. In Forwards
nal direction
mode the the Direction To Tail button can be used to direct the leave of
the elbow to the tail position.
 These functions


3.6.4
3.6.4.4
.4 Orien
Orientate
tate Compo
Component
nent
This allows the orientation of the current component so that direction of the arrive connection suits the leave
of the previous component (Forwards
(Forwards mode).
mode). This function does not make the axes co-linear or connect the
components.
Orientate Component
 This function
3.6.4.5
3.6.4.5 Flip Comp
Component
onent
This function
function flip
flips
s the arr
arrive
ive and leav
leave
e of a single
single compone
componentnt whi
whilst
lst maintaini
maintaining
ng the position.
position. This wil
willl
change the flow direction through the component which is useful for single direction components such as
no
non-
n-re
retu
turn
rn valv
valves
es;; or to chan
change
ge the ori
orien
entat
tatio
ion
n of a le
leve
verr or ha
handw
ndwhee
heell on a ba
ball
ll or butt
butterf
erfly
ly valv
valve
e
respectively.
Flip Component
 This function is
is not
not influenced


3.6.4
3.6.4.6
.6 Align
Align/Dire
/Direct
ct Selecti
Selection/Co
on/Compone
mponent
nt
These functions are often used in conjunction with one another, but not in every case. They align the origin
of the bend or elbow with the next or previous component and direct the angle of the bend or elbow to
complete the route.
 For th
the
e Align Selecti
Selection/Compon
on/Component
ent func
functi
tion
on to wo
work
rk co
corre
rrect
ctly
ly im
impl
plie
ied
d tub
tube
e is re
requi
quired
red wh
whic
ich
h
constrains the movement of the elbow along its centreline. Without the implied tube the results are
difficult to predict.
In the example below the pipe route is being modified so that the current 45 degree elbow is aligned to the
next component, a 90 degree elbow. The angle of the 45 degree elbow is then changed to the suit the
required direction.
Alig
Align
n Sel
Selec
ecti
tion/
on/Co
Compo
mponen
nentt Dire
Direct
ct Se
Sele
lecti
ction
on/C
/Com
ompon
ponen
entt
 The same fun

functi
ctions
ons could have bee
been
n app
applie
lied
d to the downstrea
downstream
m
90 degree elbow. This would have had the result of moving the
downstream 90 degree elbow and maintain the position of the 45
degree elbow. The angle of the 90 degree elbow would then be
changed to 45 degrees.
 These
These fun
functi
ctions
ons are not
not influenc
influenced
ed by
by Forwards/Backwards
direction mode


3.
3.6.
6.5
5 Othe
Otherr Fu
Func
nctio
tions
ns
Advanced Drag Move
Advanced
Advanced Move
Modify Arrive/Leave
Auto Complete
3.6.5.1
3.6.5.1 Modify Arr
Arrive/L
ive/Leav
eave
e
This allows the modification of the arrive and leave of an inline component without changing the orientation.
A common example of this is for a tee fitting to require the branch to be changed from P3 to P2.
the Modify Arrive/Leave button

Clicking the Modify Arrive/Leave button as shown will open the relevant form.
It can be seen that normally the Arrive is P1

and the Leave is P2, with P3 as the
connection for another branch.
This can be reconfigured to suit alternative requirements. For instance it may be a requirement to set the
Leave as
Leave as P3 and keep the Arrive
the Arrive as
as P1 which will result in P2 being the free connection for the branch. This
can be achieved using the pull down menus on the form and clicking the Apply
the Apply button:
button:
 In the above instance it would be necessary to reconfigure

reconfigure the connection
connection for the branch
branch..
 This function
function is not influenced
influenced by Forwards /
Forwards / Backwards direction
Backwards direction mode.


3.6.5
3.6.5.2
.2 Auto Comp
Complete
lete
The Auto
Auto Complet
Complete e butto
button
n will
will automa
automatitica
cally
lly compl
complete
ete the route
route of thethe curre
current
nt bra
branch
nch.. The route
route is
complet
comp leted
ed using
using default
default selecti
selections
ons fro
fromm the specif
specifica
icatio
tion
n for fla
flange
nges s and elbows.
elbows. These are the first
first
element
elements s of their
their type in the specifica
specificatio
tion.
n. The complet
completeded rou
route
te wil
willl be orth
orthogo
ogonal
nal and clash
clash free.
free. Any
existing
existing components that were present will remain in their original
original positions.
positions.
Auto Complete
As an example, if this is applied to BRAN /200-B-4/B1 created in the previous worked example the logic
applied can be easily seen..
3.6.5.3
3.6.5.3 Adva
Advanced
nced Drag Move
Move/Move
/Move
Clicking the Advanced
the Advanced Move or
Move or Advanced
Advanced Drag Move buttons
Move buttons will open the relevant form as shown below.
 These are the advanced forms and are consequently handled in the user guides.


3.7 Piping
Piping Co
Compo
mponen
nentt Edi
Editor
tor For
Form
m – Mod
Modifi
ificat
cation
ion – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
This worked example will modify the elbows belonging to PIPE /200-B-4 already created in the previous
worked example.
Navigate to the ELBO1

ELBO1 of BRAN 200-B-4/B1 in the
the Model
Explorer .
Click the Modify

Modify > Modi
Modify
fy Com
Compone
ponent
nt button
button to dis
display
play
the Piping
form.
Alternatively if the form is already open click the Set

Working Branch button.
button. This will updat
update
e the form to suit
the current pipe.
With the Modify
the Modify tab
tab selected ensure the Forwards
the Forwards direction
direction
mode is active, if necessary click the Change To Forwards
Mode button
Mode button and click the D
the D axis on the Direction
the Direction tool.
tool.
Sele
Selectct th
the
e dodowwnstr
nstrea
eam
m el
elbo
bow
w fr from
om thethe Component
Sequence List to
List to make ELBO2
make ELBO2 th
the
e C
CEE. This is reflected in
the 3D
the 3D View.
View .


Click the Connect
the Connect To Previous
Previous button.
button.
Clic
Click
k th
the
e Nex
Nextt Com
Compone
ponent
nt butt
button
on fr
from
om th
the
e
Position
Position Through section.
Through section.
Click the Direction
the Direction To Next
Next button.
button.
Se
Sele
lect
ct th
the
e downs
downstretream
am el
elbow
bow from
from the
the Component
Sequence List to
List to make ELBO3
make ELBO3 the
the CE
CE..


Cli
Click
ck the Direct Selecti
Selection/Compon
on/Component
ent button
button to
complete the route.
Savework
3.8
3.8 Bran
Branch
ch Co
Comp
mpon
onen
ents
ts Hi
Hier
erar
arch
chy
y Or
Orde
der
r
With equipment and structure elements, the order in which the elements are created is of no importance to
the final outcome. With piping components, the order in which they are laid out, as well as their individual
positions
positions and orientation
orientations,
s, determines
determines the final pipe route.
To help with this a Component

a Component Position Pointer is is displayed at the current element. This aids the selection
of With
With Flow
Flow or Against
Against Flow on the Select
the Select tab
tab of the Piping
form. The direction and
position of the Component
the Component Position Pointer is determined by the selection. This indicates the position of
the new component
component being created.
created.
This is demonstrated below on the elbow created previously on PIPE /200-B-4.

/200-B-4.
With Flow Against Flow
When using AVEVA E3D the hierarchy order becomes second nature after the creation of a number of
branches. However during the initial use careful attention should be paid to the order of the hierarchy.
Consider carefully where the next item is going to be inserted by watching the Component Pointer
Pointer and
checking the Model
the Model Explorer or
or Component
Component Sequence List frequently.
List frequently.
 When creating
creating a component at the branch head or branch tail,
tail, the branch must be the curren
currentt element.
This was demonstrated in the previous worked example, see section 3.4.


3.
3.9
9 Inse
Insert
rtin
ing
g In
Inli
line
ne Fi
Fitt
ttin
ings
gs
Thus far this guide has only covered the creation of components using the connect method. However inline
components can be inserted into the tube elements of the branch.
From
From the
the Standard
Standard Components
Components tab
tab clic
click
k the
the
Flange
Flange button.
button.
Select the FSO
the FSO flange form the SType
the SType list.
list.
the Auto Create checkbox

Ensure the Auto Create checkbox is checked.
Click the Insert
the Insert button.
button.
The prompt to ‘Identify branch leg for Flange:’

Flange:’ is
displayed .
The insertion position is indicated on the implied tube in the 3D

the 3D View:-
View:-
 The insertion
insertion of tees and reducers is covered
covered in the forthcom
forthcoming
ing worked example
example


Create checkbox
The checking of the Auto Create checkbox results
in both flanges being inserted in to the implied tube
as shown. The form then allows the selection of an
alternative
alternative flange for the second flange.
Sele
Select the FSO fl
ct the flan
ange
ge frfro
om the
the Available
Alternatives list
Alternatives the Done button.
list and click the Done button.
The selection of the alternative flange is applied to

the CE.
the CE. It may be necessary to indicate the flange
to be chan
changegedd in the
the 3D View
View or
or Component
Sequence List before
List before making the selection on the
form..
 This
This is th
the
e sa
same
me wo
work
rkfl
flow
ow fo
forr al
alll fl
flan
ange
ged
d
components.
Leaving
Leavin g the Au
Auto
to Cre
Create
ate chec
checkbox
kbox unchecked
unchecked
resu
resullts in a sin
singl
gle
e flan
flange
ge bein
being
g adde
added
d to the
the
branch
bra
an nch.. Con
Consequ
sequentl
alternative ently
y there
as shown there is no. option
previously.
previously option to select
select
The orientati
orientation
on of the flange is determi ned by the With Flo
determined Flow
w or
or Against
Against Flow button.
button. However
However when
inserting single flanges there is a Flip
a Flip Compone
Component
nt button
button available from the Create
the Create Components section
Components section of
the form in case the orientation of the flange needs to be amended.


3.10
3.10 Dele
Deletin
ting
g Co
Comp
mpon
onen
ents
ts
So far this guide has covered the creation and modification of pipes, branches and components, however
from time to time it is necessary to delete components from the branch.
Using the Model
the Model Explorer , 3D View
View or Component
Component Sequence List indicate
List indicate the component to be deleted,
in this case it is the tee created in the previous section.
In the Delete
the Delete group, the Delete button
group, click the Delete button
Alternatively, individual components can be deleted directly from the

Model Explorer by selecting Delete..
by using the right click and selecting Delete
A
A Confirm
Confirm form
form appears requiring the confirmation of the deletion. Click
the Yes button
button to delete
delete the component
component,, remo
removin
ving
g it from the
the Model
Explorer and
and the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
 This form will not appear

appear if the user has requested not to be asked to
confirm the deletion previously on the form or via the Project tab.
 Pipe and Branches

Branches can also be deleted using the same process.
process.


3.11
3.11 Delet
Deleting
ing a Ran
Range
ge of Pip
Piping
ing Com
Compon
ponen
ents
ts
It is possible to graphically indicate the first and last component within a range and then delete them in a
single operation.
operation. In this case the flanges,
flanges, gasket and reducer will be deleted.
deleted.
In the Tools
the Tools group,
group, click the Delete
the Delete Range button.
Range button. A prompt appears, ‘Identify
‘ Identify start of range selection to
delete’ , indicate the first component. A second prompt now appears, ‘Identify
‘Identify end of range selection to
delete’ , indicate the last component.
The components are highlighted in the 3D

the 3D View and
View and a
Confirm alert
Confirm alert form appears, requiring the confirmation of the
deletion?
deletion? Click the
the Yes
Yes button to delete the range of
components.
Alternatively the components to be deleted can be

highlighted by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard
while indicating
using indicating them
a window. thefrom the 3D
the 3D group,
In the Common View or
View or
Common group, by fencing
select them in
the Selection
the Selection
option from the Delete
the Delete button
button options list.


3.12
3.12 Piping
Piping Com
Compon
ponent
ent Edi
Editor
tor For
Form
m – Inli
Inline
ne Fitt
Fitting
ings
s – (Wor
(Worke
ked
d Examp
Example)
le)
The fi
first
rst pa
part
rt of th
this
is work
worked
ed examp
examplele will
will con
contin
tinue
ue th
the
e cr
crea
eati
tion
on of BRAN /150-A-57/B1
/150-A-57/B1 by addin
adding
g the
the
necessary valve and reducer at the suction
necessary suction connection
connection nozzle /P1502B/N1
nozzle /P1502B/N1..
Add PIPE
Add PIPE /150-A-57
/150-A-57 and
and :PUMP
:PUMP 1502B to
1502B to the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
Open the Piping
the Piping Component Editor form
form
Connect a #300 weld neck flange and gasket at the tail.
The upstream bore of the branch needs to be increased

to 150mm to suit the head bore. With the flange selected,
from the Standard Components tab click the Reducer
button as shown.
A selection is made from the Stype list. list. In this example

the SType
the SType Filter has
has been set to CONC
to CONC..
The Leave Bore can also be used to filter. This combined

with the Config selection will impact on the appearance of
the SType
the SType list.
list.
The Config
The Config options
options determine the orient
orientation
ation of the reducer:-
Arrive Major, Leave Minor
Arrive Minor, Leave Major
In th
this
is ca
case
se if the
the Leave
Leave Bore
Bore textbox
textbox is unset and the
the
Arrive Minor, Leave Major Major has been selected, the SType
list will display all concentric reducers with an arrive bore of
100m
100mm m andand a leav
eave bore
bore gr grea
eate
terr than
than 100m
100m that
that ar
are
e
available
avail able in the A1A
the A1A specification.
specification.
In this example set the Leave Bore to 150mm.

Leave Bore to 150mm.
Ensure that the Against

the Against Flow button
Flow button is selected.
Click the Connect
the Connect button.
button.


The reducer will be added to the flange as shown.
With the reducer previously created still the CE,

CE, click the Valve
button from the Standard
the Standard Components tab.
Components tab.
From the Select tab select the VALVE GATE from the SType
list.
Ensuring the Against Flow button and Auto Create check box
have been selected click the Connect
the Connect button.
button.
An Error message is displayed indicating that the connection of

th
the
e de
defa
faul
ultt fl
flan
ange
ge type
type is no
nott comp
compatatib
ible
le wi
with
th the
the re
redu
duce
cer.
r.
Consequently the flange and connected components have been
moved by 100mm.
Th
Thee de
defa
faul
ultt flan
flange
ge,, FS
FSO
O an
and
d valv
valve
e wi
will
ll be adde
addedd
up
upstr
strea
eam
m of the the reduc
reducer
er as show
shown.
n. The Alt
Alter
erna
nate
te
flange available labels are shown as a prompt.
In this case the flange downstream of the valve needs

to be chan angged to wel eld
d neck so that it can be
connected
conne cted directly to the reducer.
Indicate the flange in the 3D

the 3D View to
View to make it the CE
the CE..


From theclick
the Select
WN and
WN and Select tab
the tab
the Donein button.
the Available Alternatives
the
Done button. Alternatives section, select
The selected flange will be changed accordingly. The position of

the flange and the connected components needs to be corrected.
Select the Modify
the Modify tab the Change to Backwards Mode
tab and click the Change
button.
Click Connect
Click the Connect To Prev
Previous
ious button
button,, whi
which
ch in Backwards
mode will connect to the next component.
A
A Confirm form appears asking ‘Do
Confirm form ‘ Do you want to connect all the
selected
selected items? ’.
’. Click the
the Yes
Yes button
button to reposition the selected
flange and the connected gaskets, valve and flange.


The connected components are repositioned so that the weld

neck flange is connected directly to the reducer.
Rename the valve to be V129

be V129..
The rotati
rotation
on of the
the valv
valve
e ne
need
eds
s to be cha
change
nged
d so that
that the
the
spindle of the handwheel is pointing South
pointing South..
the Change to Forwards Mode

Click the Change Mode button.
button.
From the Modify
the Modify tab
tab on the form click the Rotate Component
button.
a 90 degree
With the valve selected indicate a 90 degree rotation.
Select the branch level either using the Model

the Model Explorer or
or the
Component
Compone nt Sequence
Sequence List.
List.
Click the Elbow
the Elbow button
Components tab.

www.aveva.com

From
From the Select tab select the EL90 as show
shown
n from
from the
the
SType list.
SType list.
Ensuring the With Flow button has been selected click the
Connect button.
Connect button.
The direction of the elbow needs to be changed so that the

leave of the elbow is pointing Down
pointing Down..
Se
Sele
lect
ct th
the
e Modify tab
tab on the
the form
form and
and enensu
suri
ring
ng that
that
the Down direction.
Forwards mode is inuse click the Down direction.
The elbow is rotated to the correct orientation and now needs

to be re
repo
posi
siti
tion
oned
ed midwa
midway y betw
betweeeen
n the
the two
two pumps
pumps.. Ad
Add
d
:PUMP 1502A to
1502A to the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
Click the DESIGN
the DESIGN AIDS > Construction Aids > Line
> Line button
button
to create a construction line between the pump axes.
Copyright © 2013 68
www.aveva.com

Click Cursor
Click the Cursor Pic
Pickk butto
button
n fro
from
m the
the Position
Through section
Through section of the form.
Set the Positioning
the Positioning Control form to Graphics and
Midpoint .
Midpoint.
In
Indi
dicat
cate
e the
the cons
constru
truct
ctio
ion
n line
line in the
the 3D Vi
View
ew as
shown.
With the elbow previously created still the CE the Tee

the CE,, click the Tee
Components tab.
69 www.aveva.com

Once
On ce ag
agai
ain
n a selec
selectition
on is mad
made
e fro
from
m the
the sType list. In the
example shown the sType
the sType Filter has to T..
has been set to T
The Conn Bore can also be used to filter, 150mm has been
used in this example.
The Config
The Config options
options determines the flow through the tee:-
Flow Through Tee creates a tee with the

arrive set to P1 and leave by the inline leg
P2
Leave
Leave By ConConnec
nection
tion creat
creates
es a tee with
with
the arrive set to P1 and leave by the offline
leg P3
Arrive By Connec
Connection
tion creat
creates
es a tee
tee with
with
the arrive set to P3 and leave by the inline
leg P2
In the Config.
the Config. section
section click the Arrive
the Arrive By Connection button.
Connection button.
the With Flow

Ensure that the With Flow button
button is selected.
Click the Connect
the Connect button.
button.
The tee will be connected directly to the elbow using the P3

connection of the tee.
The vertical position of the tee needs

to be suitable so that the connecting
tube
tube can
can be suppsuppororte
ted.
d. Fr
From
om the
the
Modify tab
Modify the Advanced Move
tab click the Advanced
button.
Add the GENSEC
the GENSEC shown
shown to the 3D
the 3D View and
View and select a view direction looking North.
www.aveva.com

From the
From the Clearance tab
tab of the
the Advanced
Advanced Move
form set the Clearance and Direction of
of 0mm and
D from the Parameters
the Parameters section
section respectively.
options list set to In front check

With Relative To options
the Plane
the Plane Through Target
Target checkbox.
checkbox.
In th
the
e Plane textbox
textbox enter
enter Z and
and click
click the
the Pick
Target Element button.
Element button.
Indicate the GENSEC
the GENSEC in
in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
This will populate the Name

the Name textbox.
textbox. Click the Apply
the Apply
button.
The form can now be closed.
The tee will be positioned to allow for the 50mm thick

insulation that has been specified for the branch.
Copyright © 2013
71 www.aveva.com

With the tee previously created still the CE the Elbow

the CE,, click the Elbow
Components tab.
From the Select tab selec

From the EL90 as show
selectt the shown
n fro
from
m the
the
SType list.
SType list.
Ensuring
Ensuring the
the With Flow button has been selected click the
Connect button.
Connect button.
Se
Sele
lect
ct th
the
e Modify tab
tab on the
the form
form an
and
d cli
click the
the Next
Component button
Component button from the Position
the Position Through section
Through section of the
form.
This will extend the leg so that the elbow is aligned in the
East axis
East axis with the tail position.
position.
the South
Click the South
direction.
Copyright © 2013

The elbow will now have the correct orientation.
Click the
the Copy
Copy Compone
Component
nt button.
button.
Thi
This will add
add anothe
ther elbow
bow which need
eeds to be
repositioned.
Click the Next Com

Click Compone
ponentnt butt
button
on fro
from
m the
the Position
Through section
Through section of the form.
Cl
Clic
ick
k the Dire
the Di rect
ctio
ion
n To Nex
extt
button from the Orientation
section of the form.

The branch will now be complete.
Savework..
Savework

3.1
3.13
3 Comple
Completin
ting
g the
the Ar
Arran
rangem
gement
ent - Copy
Copying
ing – (Wor
(Worked
ked Ex
Examp
ample)
le)
Often it is more efficient to copy a branch that contains similar components rather than create a new one. In
this worked example the valve arrangement at the suction of :PUMP
of :PUMP P1502B belonging
P1502B belonging to BRAN /150-A-
57/B1 needs
57/B1 needs to copied and then connected to :PUMP P1502A.
Add :PUMP
Add :PUMP P1502A to
P1502A to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Navigat
Navigate
e to BRAN
BRAN /150-A-57/B1
/150-A-57/B1 in the Model
Explorer .
Select Home
Select > Copy Offset.
Home > Common > Copy Offset.
The Copy with Offset form appears but the values

required to perform the copy are not known.
Select Ho
Select Home
me > Measu
Measure Distance..
re > Measure Distance
The Measure Distance form

The Measure Distance form and Positioning
and Positioning
Control toolbar
Control toolbar are displayed. Select Element
Select Element and
and
Snap from
Snap from the Positioning
the Positioning Control toolbar.
Control toolbar.

In th
the
e 3D View
View in
indica
dicate
te two identi
identical
cal element
elements
s
belonging to the pumps. For example the discharge
nozzles as shown
This will popula

populate
te the Offset
Offset X value
value fiel
field
d on the
the
Measure Distance form.
Distance form.
Copy and Paste the

the value fr fro
om the Meaure
Distance form into the X textbox of the Copy with
Offset form.
form. Ensu
Ensure
re the
the di dire
rect
ctio
ion
n of the
the offse
offsett is
al
allow
lowed
ed for with
with the
the ne
negat
gativive
e valu
valuee and
and clic
click
k the
the
Apply button.
Apply button.
On the Confirm form click the Yes button to retain

th
the
e copy
copy.. Fo
Foll
llow
owed
ed by the Cancel butt
button
on on the
Copy with Offset form.
Offset form.
The branch has now been copied and the tail is

positioned
positioned at the suction connection of :PUMP
:PUMP
P1502A.
 Th
The
e sa
same
me pr
proc
oced
edure
ure can be us
used
ed to co
copy
py a
pipe that contains branches

To complete the copying process the branch will need to be modified using the functionality already covered
in this training
training guide:-
guide:-
 Use the Pipe
the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe form
Pipe form to connect:
 the head to
to TEE
TEE 1 belonging
1 belonging to BRAN
to BRAN /150-A-57/B1
 the tail to
to :PUMP
:PUMP P1502A/N1
P1502A/N1..
 Rename the branch to

to /150-A-57/B2
/150-A-57/B2..
 Use the Delete
the Delete Range function
Range function to remove the unwanted tee and elbow.
 Use the Modify
the Modify tab
tab of the Piping
the Piping Component Editor form
form or the Model
the Model Editor to
to redirect the
remaining elbow towards the P1 of TEE
TEE 1 belonging
1 belonging to BRAN
to BRAN /150-A-57/B1.
 Rename the valve to be

be V130
V130..
 Perform a Savework.
Savework.

Exercise 2 – Component Creation – Pipe /100-B-8
Create Pipe /100-B-8, Branch /100-B-8/B1 and

Create Pipe /100-B-8/B1 and Branch /100-B-8/B2 below
/100-B-8/B2 below ZONE ZONE-PIPING-AREA01
using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process System B

Specification = A3B
 Bore = 100mm
Use weld neck flanges

flanges for the valves
valves and slip-on flanges elsewhere.
elsewhere.
 The weld neck flanges

flanges down
downstre
stream
am of the valves
valves coul
could
d be slip-on
slip-on ins
instea
tead.
d. These wil
willl be cha
change
nged
d to
slip-on in the next section of the guide
The suggested workflow for this exercise is as follows:-
 Add the
the EQUI element
elements
s to be connecte
connected
d to the
3D View.
View.
 Create pipe and branch /100-B-8/B1

branch /100-B-8/B1..
 Connect
Connect head and tail
tail to equipmen
equipmentt items.
 Create flange/gasket
flange/gasket at head and tail.
tail.
 Create elbow at head and tail, offs

ffset to
distances shown.
 Create
Create tee upst
upstrea
ream
m of elbow at tail
tail,, offset to
distance shown. Ensure the stype of ‘T’ is used.
 Cr
Crea
eate
te el
elbo
bow
ws and posipositi
tion
on usin
usingg Next
Component and
Component and Direction
Direction To Next
Next functions.
functions.
 Connect
Connect gate valves,
valves, complete
complete with flanges
flanges and
gaskets, to elbow and tee.
 Name the valves as s

shown.
hown.

 Create branch /100-B-8/B2
branch /100-B-8/B2..
 Connect
Connect the
the hea
head
d to the tee owned
owned by
/100-B-8/B1..
/100-B-8/B1
 Connect
Connect the tail to the equipe
equipement.
ment.
 Create flange/gasket at the tail.
 Perform
Perform a Savework.
Savework.
 The gate valve has been deliberately

deliberately omitted for branch /100-B-8/B2.
/100-B-8/B2.

3.14
3.14 Piping
Piping Co
Compo
mponen
nentt Edi
Editor
tor For
Form
m – Res
Resele
electi
ction
on
Frequently it is necessary to modify single components by using the Reselect

the Reselect tab
tab available from the Piping
the Piping
form.
The Reselect tab works similarly to the Modify tab in

that the form tracks the current element.
The upper section of the tab lists the component name,

specification and bore.
The select
selection
ion of an alt
alterna
ernativ
tive
e Type and Sub-Type
fro
fromm the availabl
available
e option
options
s lists
lists is pos
possibl
sible
e which
which wil
willl
filter the components available for selection.
To reselect a component click one of the components

from the list.
The appearance of the Reselect

the Reselect tab
tab is dependent upon
the type of component currently selected. In this case
an elbow is the current element allowing the angle of
the elbow to be modified by the form.
The Component Sequence List is also available to aid

navigation.
 The de
defau
fault
lt beh
behav
avio
iour
ur of th
the
e Reselect
Reselect form
form is
cont
control
rolle
led
d by the Piping
Piping Set
Setting
tings
s form
form,, se
see
e
Appendix A.3 for details.
Any errors that occur as a result of the reselection

function are displayed on the Errors
the Errors tab.
tab.

3.15
3.15 Piping
Piping Com
Compon
ponent
ent Edi
Editor
tor For
Form
m – Rese
Reselec
lection
tion – (Worke
(Worked
d Exam
Example
ple))
This worked example will modify the flanges belonging to PIPE /100-B-8 already created in the previous
exercise.
Navigate to the FLAN3
the FLAN3 of
of BRAN
BRAN /100-
B-8/B1 in
B-8/B1 in the Model
Click Modify > Modify Compone

Click the Modify Component
nt button
button to display
display the
Piping Component Editor form.
form.
Alternatively if the form is already open click the Set Working

Branch button
Branch button to update the form to suit the current pipe.
Select the Reselect tab

Select tab and
and frfrom
om the
the Sub-Types option
option list
select FSO
select FSO to filter the selection.
Select the FSO
the FSO flange from the list to
change the flange type from Weld Neck
to Slip-On as shown.
Repeat this for the flange downstream

of valve V110.


CHAPTER 4
4 Integr
Integrato
atorr Mod
Mode
e
Integra
Integrator
tor Mode di
disp
splay
lays
s Schema
Schematitic
c and
and 3D model
model da
data
ta in an in
integ
tegra
rated
ted envi
environ
ronmen
ment;
t; It ha
has
s be
been
en
developed to help the designer see graphically if the 3D model matches the Schematic data.
When Integrator
When Integrator Mode is
Mode is selected the 3D View changes to monochrome. Schematic or 3D model objects
are selected in the 3D
the 3D View or
View or the Diagram
the Diagram Viewer .
Integrator
Integrator Mode
Mode can
can perform the following
following two key functions:-
functions:-
 Compare
 Build
 It will not be possible

possible to access the Integrator
the Integrator funnctions
funnctions from the AVEVA Powerwheel if the Editor is
is
active.
4.1
4.1 Comp
Compar
are
e 3D Mo
Mode
dell Aga
gains
instt Sc
Sche
hema
mati
tic
c Da
Data
ta
Integrator
Integrator Mode is
Mode is used to compare the 3D elements against the corresponding schematic elements and to
report any inconsi
report inconsisten
stencie
cies.
s. This
This maybe
maybe incons
inconsist
istenci
encies
es in connect
connectivi
ivity
ty or attr
attribu
ibutes
tes acc
accordi
ording
ng to pre
pre--
configured rules.
The 3D
The 3D View is
View is updated, colouring the model green when correct and red if there are any discrepancies.
Model Data Schematic Data
The designer can step through any errors on the Pipe, Branch or Branch Components on the Integrator
Mode Panel
Panel,, acc
accept
epting
ing incons
inconsist
istenc
encies
ies or copying
copying the inf
informa
ormatio
tion
n fro
from
m the Schemati
Schematic
c dat
data
a which
which is
assumed to be the master.
 In the exam
example
ple above the gat
gate
e val
valve
ve was not available
available in the piping
piping cat
catalo
alogue
gue and the designer
designer has
chosen to select a temporary valve from the HOLD specification. In this case the valve would need to
be reselected once the correct valve was available.
The designer must clear the errors on the Pipe before moving onto to handle the Branch errors. This is also
the same when considering Branch and Branch Component errors.

4.
4.2
2 Build
Build 3D Mo
Mode
dell fr
from
om Sc
Sche
hema
mati
tic
c Da
Data
ta
Integra
Integrator
tor Mode can
can creat
create
e 3D el
eleme
ement
nts
s us
usin
ing
g da
data
ta from
from the
the corre
corresp
spon
ondi
ding
ng sche
schemat
matic
ic el
eleme
ement
nts.
s.
Connecting objects such as Equipment and Pipes and setting key attributes such as tags and process data
using pre-configured rules.

4.3 Integra
Integrator
tor Mod
Mode
e - Com
Compar
pare
e Pip
Pipe
e - (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Ex
Examp
ample)
le)
To ensure consistency within the Training Guide the Integrator Mode options must be set as shown from
the Project
the Project tab.
tab.
Click the PROJECT
the PROJECT
> Options >
Discipline >
Integrator button.
button.
Use the following settings:-
Compare Configuration Select Piping

Select Check from the options list.
Piping Check from
Accept Differences the ACCEPT-DIFFERENCES_GRP

Select the ACCEPT-DIFFERENCES_GRP
Limit Points Select the LIMIT_POINTS_WLD

the LIMIT_POINTS_WLD
Build Pipe/ Equipment ZONE:-

ZONE:-
the Model Explorer Select checkbox.

Check the Model Select checkbox.
Build Pipe/Branch Uncheck both checkboxes.
Build Component Check the Invoke

the Invoke Model Editor checkbox.
checkbox.
Integrator
Integrator Mode Check the Show
the Show Issues in 3D
3D and
and Auto Zoom To Issue checkbox.
Issue checkbox.
Compare Configuration The

There
re ar
are
e se
seve
veral
ral Compare
Compare Configuration
Configuration options.
options. These
These
determine colour of the feedback to the user and the attributes
being compared. The Piping Check has been configured to a
colour the pipes and components Green or Red depending on
the results.

Accept Differences In some

some instanc
instances
es itit iis
s not
not possible
possible for the
the 3D
3D model
model to be
be exactly
exactly aligned with
the 2D schematic data. When this occurs the designer has the option to accept
these differences. These are then stored in a Group Set (GPSET), in this case
/ACCEPT-GROUP.. The Purpose
/ACCEPT-GROUP The Purpose attribute
attribute of the owning Group World (GPWL)
is ‘INTE
INTE’.
’.
Limit Points During

During the design
design phase
phase of a project
project the designe
designerr may wis
wish
h to check
check a pip
pipe
e
within a specific area, rather than the whole pipe. The boundary of the area can
be defined using Integrator Limit Points. These can be created in the design
database that reference the schematic drawing. These Limit Points are stored
in a Integrator Limit Point World (ILPWRL) in this case /ILPWORLD.
Build
Build Pi
Pipe
pe// Equip
Equipmen
mentt If Integrator is used to create pipes the designer must set the creation location.
ZONE There are three radio buttons that are used to control the location:-
 Rules
Rules - - will build the pipe in the location as described in the Integrator
configuration file
 Model Explore
Explorerr Select
Select – will build the pipe in the location selected
from the Model
the Model Explorer
Explorer as as shown in this worked example.
 Track Desig
Design n CE
CE - - will require the designer to navigate to the location
in the Model
the Model Explorer where
where the pipe is to be created.
Build Pipe/Branch This section

section of the form conta
contains
ins two checkboxes:-
checkboxes:-
Auto Route Branches
Enable Auto Route Clash Check
Checking
ing
 These options
options have not been implemented
implemented yet. They will be included in a
laterr re
late rele
leas
ase
e of E3
E3D.
D. Co
Cons
nseq
eque
uent
ntly
ly bo
both
th ch
chec
eckb
kbox
oxes
es sh
shou
ould
ld be
unchecked.
Build Component Checking

Checking the Invoke
the Invoke Model Editor checkboxs
Editor checkboxs will result in Pipe
in Pipe Editor being
being
automatically
automatically invoked
invoked when a compone
componentnt is built.
Integrator
Integrator Mode This section
section of the form conta
contains
ins two checkboxes:-
checkboxes:-
 Show Iss
Issues
ues In 3D
3D – the affects the highlighting of the element being
reported on to make it more distinguishable to the user.
 Auto Zoom To Issue
Issue – – this zooms to element being reported on.
 These options
options can also be set on the Integrator
the Integrator Panel .
Add Pipe /100-B-8
Pipe /100-B-8 to
to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Click the Tools
the Tools > Integrator
> Integrator Mode
Mode button.
button.

Th
Thee el
elem
emen
ents
ts in the
the 3D Vi
View
ew will
will be
displayed in monochrome.
Fr
From
om the
the re
resu
sult
ltin
ing
g cont
contex
extu
tual
al me
menu
nu clic
click
k
Right click
Right click on the 3D View and from the PowerWheel
Compare.
Compare.
click Integrator
click Integrator Mode
Mode..
The Integr
Integrat
ator
or Panel
Panel is
di
disp
spla
laye
yedd an
and
d the
the pi
pipe
pe is
coloured red/green
accordingly.
 Th
The
e repo
report
rted
ed iss
ssue
ues
s
mu
must
and
an dst cobe
corre
rrect inve
in
cted
edvest
stig
igat
ated
start
sta ed
rtin
ing
g
with
with ththe
e Pi Pipe
pe,, Br
Bran
anch
ch
and finally any
component problems.
The upper part of Integrator

of Integrator Panel shows 3 tabs, for the erros at the different hierarchical levels of Pipe,
Branch and Component. In this example the whole pipe is coloured red because of the Pipe and Branch
discrepancies.

The lower part of the Integrator

the Integrator Panel contains
Panel contains five buttons:-
Accept Differences
Copy from Diagram
Zoom to Object
View on Diagram
Redo Compare
the Pipe Tab

Pipe Errors - select the Pipe on the Integrator
Integrator Panel.
In th
this
is examp
example
le there
there are di
discr
screp
epanc
ancie
ies
s for Te
Temp
mper
erat
atur
ure,
e,
Description and Linetype between the Model and the Diagram.
In this case the Diagram is correct.
Se
Sele
lect
ct ea
each
ch of the
the en
entri
tries
es in turn
turn and
and clic
click
k the
the Copy fro
from
m
diagram butt
button
on to copy
copy the
the valu
values
es to the
the mode
modell fr
from
om the
the
diagram.
Compare button
Making that change has resulted in the Redo Compare button
becoming available. It is highlighted to indicate that it needs to
be used to update the feedback on Integrator
on Integrator Panel.
Panel.
Click the Redo
the Redo Compare button.
Compare button.
There are no Pipe issues now but

the majority of the pipe is still red
because of the Branch issues.

Branch Errors -
- select the Branch
the Branch Tab on the
Integrator Panel.
Panel. The 3D
The 3D View will
View will zoom to the Branch.
Se
Sele
lect
ct the
the entry
entry for
for the Tempe
Temperaratu
ture
re er
erro
ror,
r, clic
click
k the
the
Copy
Co py fro
fromm DiDiag
agra
ram
m butto
button
n follo
followe
wedd by the
the Redo
Compare button.
Compare button.
the Missing Element SCVALV /V111 and

Once again from the Branch errors tab select the entry for the Missing /V111 and click the
Diagram button.
View on Diagram button.
This could also be done via the AVEVA Powerwheel by

View Diagram
selecting View
selecting Diagram..

The Diagram
The Diagram Viewer form
form will open and display the pipeline
pipeline highlighted
highlighted accordingly
accordingly..
Using the left mouse and hold the CTRL key

CTRL key to zoom in and CTRL
and CTRL+
+SHIFT key
SHIFT key to zoom out . A window can
also be created as well as using the mouse wheel to zoom in/out.
V111 using the right mouse

Select the missing Valve V111
button and click the Build
the Build VALV
VALV option.
option.
An Integrator message
An Integrator message form will be displayed relating
to the released status of the schematic element. Click
ther Yes
Yes button on the form.

The valv
valve
e chang
changeses colo
colour
ur to cyan
cyan on the
the
diagram. The Diagram Viewer
Viewer can now be
closed.
The valve is added to the Branch in the 3D

View and the Route Editor is
is automatically
in
invo
voke
ked,
d, al
allo
lowi
wing
ng the
the co
comp
mpon onen
entt to be
repositioned.
Left click the handle on the Route Editor

Editor to
and position the curosr over the other leg of
the branch in an arbitrary position as shown.
Left
Left clic
click
k aga
again to fix
fix the
the posi
positi
tio
on The
The
po
posi
siti
tion
on wi will
ll be fina
finali
lise
sed
d la
late
terr whe
henn the
the
flanges and gaskets are added to complete
the Branch.
 It wi
will
ll be ne
nece
cess
ssary
ary to sw
swit
ithc
hch
h of
offf th
the
e
Feature
Featur e High
Highlig
lighti
hting
ng wit
with
h the F key to
allow the repostioning in the other leg.
 The use of the Route

the Route Editor is
is covered
extensively in Chapter 5.
Click the Tools
the Tools > Modify > Editor button
button to
swicth off the Editor handles.

Click the Redo
the Redo Compare
Compare button.
button.
The 3D View will change to show the extent of Branch /100-B-8/B1 and the Integrator Panel will list the
Temperature
Temperat the Copy from Diagram button.
ure issues for this Branch. Click the Copy Diagram button.

the Redo Compare

Click the Redo Compare button.
button.
The 3D
The 3D View will zoom to the last remaining issue.
Select the Component
the Component Tab on the Integrator
Integrator
Panel.
The Specification (SPREF) of the tee is different in

th
the
e Mode
Modell fr
from
om the
the Di
Diag
agra
ram.
m. In this
this ca
case
se it is
assumed
med that the
the Mo
Moddel is corre
rect
ct and the
difference can be accepted.
With the Spref
the Spref in Model …. error selected click the
Difference button.
Accept Difference button.
Cli
lick
ck the
the Redo
Redo Co Comp
mpar
are
e
button. There are no errors on
the IntInte
egrarato
torr Pan
aneel.
Consequ
Con sequent
ently
ly the whole
whole pipe
pipe
is coloured green.

Click the Tools > Integrator Mode button to close

the Integra
Integrator
tor Panel
Panel and
and reretu
turn
rn the
the 3D View
View
colours back to the default settings.
Use the standard piping functions shown previously

to complete Branch /100-B-8-B2 by performing the
following:-
 Add a weld neck

neck flange at the Branch Head.
 Add a gasket
gasket connected
connected to
to the flange.
flange.
 Connect
Connect Valve /V111 to the
the gasket
gasket..
 Add a slip-on
slip-on flange and
and gasket to the valv
valve.
e.
 Perform a Savework
Savework..

Exercise 3 - Integrator Mode – Compare
Use Integrator
Use Integrator Mode to
Mode to compare Pipes /200-B-4
Pipes /200-B-4 and
and /80-B-7
/80-B-7 with
with the schematic data.
/200-B-4 /80-B-7
As each pipe is compared perform a visual check of the Diagram.


4.
4.4
4 Integ
Integra
rato
torr Mo
Mode
de - Bu
Build
ild Pi
Pipe
pe - (W
(Wor
orke
ked
d Ex
Exam
ampl
ple)
e)
In the following worked example the inline components on Pipe /100-B-2

/100-B-2 are
are created from the Diagram and
then
the n positio
positioned.
ned. The Gasket
Gaskets,
s, Flange
Flanges s and Elbows
Elbows need
need to be created
created and positio
positioned
ned using
using the Piping
Piping
forms shown previously. The connections at the Pipe Head and some process information will be passed
from the Diagram.
Diagram.
 Pr
Primary System = Process System B
 Bore = 100mm
 As al
alll the in
info
forma
rmatio
tion
n is be
bein
ing
g pa
passe
ssed
d di
direc
rectl
tly
y fro
from
m th
the
e Di
Diagr
agram
am th
the
e on
only
ly in
info
form
rmati
ation
on th
the
e Pi
Pipi
ping
ng
Designer requires is the elevation of the components at U100610.
Completed Pipe /100-B-2
Pipe /100-B-2.. In-line components created via Integrator .

Integrator
Click Tools > Integrator Mode followed
by
by Tools
Tools > Open Diagram
Diagram to
to display the
View Diagram form.
Diagram form.
Se
Sele
lect the SCGROUP
ct the SCGROUP SCHEMA
SCHEMATICS-
TICS-
PIPING-AREA01 folder.
PIPING-AREA01 folder.
From the
From the Diagram
Diagram Page
Page section
section select
A0-01-2012-0001..
A0-01-2012-0001
Check the Preview checkbox to show a

preview of the diagram
Buttons
Buttons are provide
provided
d to manipul
manipulate
ate the
preview:-
 Zoom In
 Zoom Out
 Fit to Screen
Th
The
e prprev
evie
iew
w ca
can n al
also
so be pa
pann
nned
ed by
holding down the Alt
holding the Alt key.
key.
Click the OK button to open the diagram

in the Diagram
Diagram Viewer form.
form. The View
Diagram form
Diagram form will close automatically.
Hold down
Hold down the CTRL key and crcrea
eate
te a
window around control set of Pipe /100-B-
Pipe /100-B-
2.

The Diagram Viewer will

The Diagram will zoom in to make the
detail more visible.
The Build
Build Pipe/Eq
Pipe/Equipment
uipment Zone options
options on
the PROJECT tab shown previously were set
Mode
to Mo dell Ex
Explo
plorer
rer Se
Selec
lectt. Sele
Select
ct ZO
ZONE
NE
/ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 fr from the Model
Explorer and from the right click menu select
Explorer
ZONE.
Set Build ZONE.
Plac
Placin
ingg the
the curs
cursor
or ov
over
er the
the pi
pipe
peli
line
ne in the
the
diagram will cause that section to change from
blue to yellow.
From the right mouse button menu select Build

select Build
PIPE (Zone /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01).
/ZONE-PIPING-AREA01).
 Th
The
e Co
Comp
mpar
are/
e/Bu
Buil
ild
d op
opti
tion
ons
s ar
are
e on
only
ly
available
available when in Integrator Mode.
An Integrator
An Integrator form
form is displayed.
the Yes button.

Click the Yes

The pipeline on the diagram will change colour to cyan and the piping components will be created and added
to the 3D
the 3D View.
View . The Diagram
The Diagram Viewer form
form can now be closed.
To compl
complet
ete
e the
the pi
pipe
pe the
the forms
forms and
and func
functi
tion
onss
show
shownn pr
previ
eviou
ously
sly will
will be used
used.. Thi
This
s has
has been
been
included in this worked example for
completeness.
 It has been assumed that

that Integrator Mode
has been exited.
Navi
Naviga
gate
te to Pipe
Pipe /100-B-2/B1 in
in the
the Model
Explorer.
Modify > Pipe to op

Click Modify open
en the
the Pipe Editor:
Modify Pipe form.
Pipe form.
The forms indicates that the Head connections of

both branches have been defined from the
diagram.
Click the Create
the Create Component button.
Component button.

Using the Piping
the Piping Component Editor
Editor form create a Gasket
and weld neck Flange at the Head.
Using the Component
the Component Sequence List select TEE1..
List select TEE1
From the Modify
the Modify tab
tab click the Modify
the Modify Arrive/Leave button.
Arrive/Leave button.
Set the Arrive to P3 and click the Apply followed by the

Dismiss buttons.
Dismiss buttons.
From the Modify
the Modify tab the Connect button.
tab click the Connect button.
The Tee is connected to the leave of the Flange via the P3.

the D axis on the Direction

Click the D the Direction tool.
tool.
Create an Elbow connected to the leave of the Tee.
The Elbow needs to be positioned explicitly at U100610.
Click Home > Modify > Move > Position button

Click Home Position button to open the
Explicit Position form.
Position form.
Enter 100610 in
100610 in the textbox for the Up value. Click the Apply
followed by the Cancel
the Cancel button.
button.

the Auto Create checkbox

Uncheck the Auto Create checkbox and create a weld
neck Flange and Gasket connected to the Elbow.
 The Auto
Auto-Cr
-Create
eate checkbox
checkbox is unc
unchec
hecked
ked at thi
this
s
stage to prevent two flanges being created. This
woul
wo uld
d be ac
acce
cepta
ptabl
ble
e bu
butt of co
cours
urse
e the se
seco
cond
nd
flange would need to be deleted.
Using the Component
the Component Sequence List select
List select the Valve
/V107 and connect it to the Gasket.
/V107 and
Create a weld neck Flange and Gasket connected to

the Valve.
Use connect
and the Component
the Component Sequence List to select REDU1
to the Flange.
the Auto Create

Uncheck the Auto Create checkbox
checkbox and create a weld
neck Flange and Gasket connected to the Reducer.
Use the Comp

Compone
onent
nt Se
Seque
quence
nce List
List to sele
select
ct
Instrument /LV-119
Instrument /LV-119 and
and connect to the Gasket.

Create
Cre ate a wel
weld
d neck
neck Fla
Flange
nge and Gasket
Gasket connected
connected to
the Instrument.
Use the Component
the Component Sequence List to select REDU 2
and connect to the Flange.
Create an Elbow connected to the Reducer and direct it

Up.
the Auto Create

Uncheck the Auto Create checkbox and create a weld
neck Flange and Gasket connected to the Reducer.
Use
Use the
the Component
Component Sequenc
Sequencee List to sele
select
ct Valve
Valve
/V109 and connect to the Gasket.
/V109 and
Use
Use the
the Rotation tool
tool to poi
point the
the sp
spiindl
ndle of the
the
handweel North.
To complete this Branch the Tail must be connected to

the last member.
From the Piping
the Piping Component Editor form the 100-
form click the 100-
B-2/B1 li
link
nk la
label
bel to acces
access
s the
the Pipe Editor:
Editor: Modify
Modify
Pipe form.
Pipe form.
With the Branch
the Branch Tail tab
Tail tab selected click the Connect
the Connect to
Last Member button.
button.

Select Branch B2 from

Branch B2 from the Connectivity
the Connectivity section.
section.
This Branch is connected to the Tee in Branch B1 but

because the Tee has been moved the form displays
an error:
the Reconnect button.
This is corrected by clicking the Reconnect button.
The Br
Bran
anch
ch HeHead
ad has now been
been repos
repositi
ition
oned
ed and
connected to the open end of the Tee of Branch B1.
This Branch can now be completed in a similar way

to the last Branch.
Connect the existing Reducer /REDU1 to
/REDU1 to the Head.
Create an Elbow connected to the Reducer.
k the Auto
Uncheck
Unchec Auto Create checkb
checkbox
ox and
and cre
creat
ate
e a
weld
weld ne
neck
ck Fl
Flanange
ge an
and
d Gask
Gasketet co
conn
nnec
ecte
ted
d to the
the
Reducer.
Connect Valve /V108
Valve /V108 to
to the Gasket.
Use the Pipe Editor:

Editor: Modify Pipe
Pipe form to connect
the Branch Tail to the last member.

Exercise 4 - Integrator Mode - /100-C-12
Create Pipe /100-C-12
Pipe /100-C-12 using
using Integrator
Integrator Mode from
Mode from diagram A0-01-2012-0001
diagram A0-01-2012-0001:-
:-
The following Process information will be set from the Diagram but should be checked
 Pr
Primary System = Process System C
 Specification = F1C
 Bore = 100mm
 Insulation = 50mm_Fibreglass
 Tracing = E-TRACING
 Temperature = 50DegC
Head Details Require Manual Input:-

Input:- Tail Details set via the Diagram:-
Diagram:-
 Connection
Connection Type = Open End  Connected to /E1301/NS1
to /E1301/NS1
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 308830
 U 106000 (This
106000 (This is an arbitrary value which will
be updated according to the route obtained).

The route will not be completed yet as it requires use of functionality that has not been covered so far in this
training guide. The arrangement below can be achieved from what has been covered.
Supplementary Information:-
 All Flanges
Flanges are #150 weld neck with suitable #150 Gaskets
Gaskets with the excepti
exception
on of those highlighted
highlighted
below which require a #300 connection to the Instruments.
 The Elbow, Flanges,
Flanges, Gasket and Instrument
Instrument upstr
upstream
eam of the arrangement can be connected
connected to the
100x80 Tee temporarily.
CHAPTER 5
5 Usin
Using
g th
the
e Edi
Edito
tor
r
So far in this guide the positioning of the components has been handled using Piping Component Editor
form. However this can also be carried out using the Editor
the Editor , which also has the capability to create the initial
route of the branch using the Quick
the Quick Pipe Router functionality.
functionality.
5.
5.1
1 Gene
Genera
rall Us
Use
e of th
the
e Ed
Edit
itor
or
If a pipe, branch or component, (singular or multiple) needs modification i.e. moving, this can be done by
using the Editor
the Editor functionality.
functionality.
The Editor
The Editor can
can be invoked in the following ways:-
 In the
the Common
Common group
group click the Editor
the Editor button.
button.
 Double click on the element

element to be moved.
When active the Editor

the Editor handles
handles can be seen in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
 The functionality
functionality relating
relating to this will be shown in greater
details
details later in this chapter.

5.1
5.1.1
.1 Moving
Moving Inl
Inline
ine Com
Compon
ponent
ents
s
This section will introduce the use of the Enter

the Enter Offset
Offset and
and Enter Distance From functions
From functions using PIPE
using PIPE /100-
B-8 as
B-8 as an example. Inline components can be distinguished by the fact they are held within the constraints
of the implied tube. Consequently the appearance of the Editor handles
handles is slightly different. These handles
are known as the Pipe
the Pipe Editing handles and limit the movement of the selection to the axes of the branch
leg.
Position
select the cursor
select Enter
Enter Offsetover
fromthe
the Pipe
Pipe
the Editing
Editing handle
right mouse handle
buttoninmenu
the North axis
the North axis and
to display the
Constrained Move form.
Move form. Enter the Offset
Offset value
value of 200mm
200mm and
and click
the Preview button
button,, if the preview
preview is acceptab
acceptable
le then cli
click
ck the
the OK
button.
Alternatively, move the cursor over the Pipe Editing handle in the North axis and select Enter Distance
From > Leave… /Origin… /Direction Change….
Change… . from the right mouse button menu. menu. The Distance from
Leave/Origin/Direction Change form
Change form appears showing the current distance, key in the distance from value
required.
required. Once again the Preview
the Preview and
and OK
OK buttons can be used as before.
If the opposite direction, (South), Pipe Editing handle

Editing handle is selected, the
menu will change to Enter Distance From > Arrive… / Origin… /
Direction Change…
 It sh
shou
ould
ld be cle
clear
ar tha
thatt the opt
optio
ions
ns ar
are
e con
conte
text
xt sen
sensi
siti
tive
ve,, fo
for
r
instance
instance the Direction
Direction Change… optio
option
n wi
will
ll be re
repl
plac
aced
ed by
Branch He Heaad… / Br Bran
ancch Ta
Taiil… depe
depend
ndin
ing
g upupon
on th
the
e
configuration
configuration of the branch.
 When the
the Editor is active a graphical aid indicates the direction
of flow within the branch. This can be toggled using the Show
Flow Arrows function.
Arrows function.

5.1.1
5.1.1.1
.1 Dista
Distance
nce Feedb
Feedback
ack
The numerical value that is displayed in the 3D View when using the Editor
Editor is known as the Distance
Feedback.. By default the value is set to the Arrive or Leave of the selection depending upon which Pipe
Feedback
Editing handle is selected. This can also be changed from the right click menu while on the Pipe
the Pipe Editing
handle and selecting Distance Feedback > From Arrive / From Leave / From Origin / From Direction
Change / From Branch Head / From Branch Tail / From Current Position.
Position .
To cycle through the different Distance

different Distance Feedback options
Feedback options available press the D
the D hot key.
As already mentioned the options that are available

are dependent upon the configuration of the branch
and will change to suit. This is indicated using PIPE
using PIPE
/150-A-57 created
/150-A-57 created previously.
The From Current Position

The From Position option
option will initially display a value of 0, but can be used in conjunction with the
handles to offset the selection by a delta value, in this case 100mm as seen functions using PIPE /100-B-8
as an example.
 The
The Editor
Editor handles
handles will be the same for valves,
flanges, reducers etc. A tee component can be
moved the same way unless it is connected at
the P3 connecti
connection.
on.

5.
5.1.
1.2
2 Mov
Move Ha
Hand
ndle
le
To aid manipulation of the graphical selection it is also possible to change to position of the handles. In the
previous section the Pipe Editing handles
Editing handles were in the correct position prior to moving the fitting. There are
frequently times when this need to be changed before any move can be carried out. To change the position
of the handles move the cursor over a Pipe Editing handle select Move
handle and from the right click menu select
Handle > Opposite End of Selection or
Selection or End
End of Selection
Selection depending
depending upon the handle selected.
Thi
This
sitione
positi
pos can
candbest
oned be
atstthe
be cen
demon
demonst
centre strat
tre of rated
edselectio
the on ation
selec gr
grou
n oup
asp alr
ofeady
co
compo
mpone
already nent
nts.
seen. s. The
Positi
Pos Pipe
itioni
oning Editing
Edit
ng the ing handles
cursor hand
overles
over thewil
will
the l ini
initial
Pipe tially
ly be
Editing
handle in the South axis select Move Handle > End of Selection
Selection from
from the right mouse button menu. The
Pipe Editing handles
Editing handles will be repositioned to the corresponding end of the selection.
Using the same Pipe Editing handle select Move Handle > Opposite End of Selection from the right
mouse button menu. The Pipe
The Pipe Editing handles
Editing handles will be repositioned to the other end of the selection.

5.1
5.1.3
.3 Moving
Moving Inli
Inline
ne Comp
Compone
onents
nts int
into
o anoth
another
er Leg
Leg of
of the Br
Branc
anch
h
Inline components that have not been connected to another branch can be moved into another leg of the
pipeline providing it is within the same branch.
Highlighting has to be inactive to move the component to other legs in the branch .Press the F ke
Feature Highlighting has keyy
to toggle this on/off.
The current status of Feature Highlighting can

Highlighting can also be
checked from the Controls
the Controls group
group of the Tools
the Tools tab.
tab.
The Pipe Editing handle

Editing handle can then be used to position the components into the other leg of the branch by
clicking the handle and hovering the cursor over the other leg. Left click again to fix the position.
 If at any point during

during the use of the
the Editor the
Editor the operation needs to be cancelled the Esc
Esc key can be
used to return the graphical selection back to its original position.
 The process of left click to select the handle and left click again to fix the position is the intended
workflow.
5.1.4
5.1.4 Rotati
Rotating
ng a Comp
Compone
onent
nt Us
Using
ing the Pip
Pipe
e Edit
Editing
ing Ha
Handle
ndle
With the Editor
the Editor active
active on the inline component left click the Rotational handle and position the cursor to set
Rotational handle
the required
required angle. Left click
click again
again to set the positio
position.
n. The delta value for the curren
currentt rotatio
rotation
n and the
resulting direction can be seen in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.

5.1
5.1.5
.5 Orient
Orientate
ate a Com
Compon
ponent
ent to a Poi
Point
nt
With the
the Editor active
active on the inline component select Orient
select Orient To Point from
Point from the right click menu. Move the
cursor over the P-points of the other components, when the orientation is correct select the P-point to fix the
rotation
rotation the Rotational handl
handlee to the requi
required
red an
angle
gle.. The delta
delta valu
valuee for the curre
current
nt rot
rotat
atio
ion
n and the
the
resulting direction can be seen in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
5.1.6
5.1.6 Align
Align a Co
Compo
mponen
nentt wit
with
h a Di
Direc
rectio
tion
n
With the Editor
the Editor active
active on the inline component select Align with Direction from the right click menu. Move
Direction from
the cursor over the P-p P-point
oints
s of the other compone
components
nts,, the direction
directional
al plane
plane wil
willl be high
highlig
lighted
hted and the
component will be aligned, when the alignment is correct select the P-point to fix the rotation.
5.1.7
5.1.7 Align
Align with a Dir
Direct
ection
ion Re
Relat
lative
ive to Axis
With the Model
the Model Editor active
active on the inline component select Align
select Align with
with from
from the right click menu .The Enter
.The Enter
Direction For Z Axis form
Axis form appears, enter E E 45 U and
U and then click the Preview
the Preview button.
button. If the preview is correct
then click the OK
the OK button,
button, if not enter another direction and repeat process
process..

5.
5.1.
1.8
8 Rota
Rotate
te by En
Ente
terin
ring
g a Va
Valu
lue
e
With the Editor

Editor active on the inline component select Enter Value from the right click menu. The Rotate
Selection About X form appears. Enter the rotational value required, in this case 180 and then click the
Preview button. If the preview is correct then click the OK button, if not enter another value and repeat
process.
 The
These
se are absolute
absolute angles
angles tak
taken
en fro
from
m the starting
starting pos
positi
ition
on i.e. ente
entering
ring “0” degr
degrees
ees at any time will
return the valve to its original position.
5.1.9
5.1.9 Move
Move an Elb
Elbow
ow / Bend
Bend in One Dir
Direc
ection
tion
As the cursor is moved over the Editor

Editor handle
handles,
s, the axis lin
line
e is highlig
highlighte
hted.
d. Mov
Move
e the cursor over the
required axis for the direction the component needs to be moved, from the right click menu select Enter
Value….. The Move
Value… The Move Selection form
Selection form now appears, key in the move value in this case 300mm
300mm and
and click the
Preview button.
Preview button. If the preview is correct then click OK
OK..
 Thi
This
s pos
positi
ition
on coul
could
d have been ach
achiev
ieve
e usi
using
ng han
handles
dles providing
providing the Lin
Linear
ear Increment
Increment setting
setting is set
accordingly.

5.1
5.1.10
.10 Move
Move an Elbo
Elbow
w / Bend in Two
Two Direc
Direction
tions
s
Move the cursor over the square forming a plane for the axes i.e. XZ, YZ, and XY on the Editor handles.
handles.
The axes lines are highlighted. From the right click menu select Enter Value….
Value…. The Move
The Move Selection form
Selection form
500mm,, 300mm and click the Preview button. If the
now appears, key in the values, in this case key in 500mm
click OK..
preview is correct then click OK
 Once again this could have been achieved by using the handle
handles
s providing the Linear Increment setting
setting
is set accordi
accordingly.
ngly.

5.1
5.1.11
.11 Move
Move Using
Using Align
Align with Fea
Featur
ture
e
Move the cursor over the required axis, from the right click menu select Align with Feature….
Feature…. A directional
arrow appears, move the cursor over another P-point that the component needs to be aligned with. When
the correct P-point is identified, select it and the elbow will be aligned with the P-point.
 If th
the
e cu
curs
rsor
or wa
was
s mo
move
ved
d ov
over
er th
the
e tw
two
o li
line
nes
s
forming a plane for the axes i.e. XZ, YZ, and
XY, then the component will be aligned through
two directions.

additional Align with Feature modes

The following steps outlining additional Align Feature modes requires insulation
insulation to be applied to PIPE
to PIPE
/150-A-57.
 See Appendix B.1 Adding / Contr

Controlling
olling insulation.
insulation.
When using other features of the model

to alilign
gn the
the pi pippe co
comp
mpon
one
ents
nts it is
possible to take in to consideration the
ou
outs
tside
ide didiame
amete terr of the
the tube
tube and
and any
in
insu
sula
lati
tion
on tha
thatt has
has be
been
en appl
applie
ied.
d. As
show
shown n hehere
re for
for PIPE /150
/150-A-
-A-57
57 and
GENSEC
GEN SEC 3 of
of FRMW /AXIS_P1.4
/AXIS_P1.4.. of
the STRU
the STRU PIPERACK
 The tu
tube
be an
and
d el
elbo
bow
w ha
have
ve be
been
en
select
selected
ed prprio
iorr to th
the
e ch
chan
ange
ge in
elevation.
Picki
Picking
ng an ed
edge
ge of the
the stee
steell work
work as
the
the featu
feature
re will
will pr
prov
ovid
ide
e five
five possi
possibl
ble
e
results.
 If the handle is repositioned

repositioned the
the O
hot ke
key
y can be used to cy
cyc
cle
through these results

Through Line
Through Linear
ar Edge
Edge – The
centerline of the tube is
po
posi
siti
tione
onedd at the
the top edge
edge of
the steel.
Tube Clearance 0mm in front

of Linear Edge – The
underside of the tube is
positioned on top of the steel.
Tube Clearance 0mm behind

Linear Edge – The top of the
tu
tube
be is posi
positi
tion
oned
ed le
leve
vell with
with
the top of the steel.
Insulation Clearance 0mm in

front
front of Line
Linear
ar Edge
Edge – The
The
unders
und erside
ide of the insulat
insulation
ion is
positioned on top of the steel.
In
Insul
sulati
ation
on Clear
Clearan
ancece 0mm
behind Linear Edge –
Edge – The top
of the ins
insula
ulatio
tion
n is posi
position
tioned
ed
level with the top of the steel.
 The
These
se all
allowa
owance
nces
s for the tub
tube
e out
outsid
side
e dia
diamet
meter
er and ins
insula
ulatio
tion
n are als
also
o appl
applica
icable
ble whe
when
n usi
using
ng the
Quick Pipe Router , see section 5.2.

5.1.1
5.1.12
2 Move Using Offse
Offsett From Fea
Feature
ture
Move the cursor over the required axis and from the right click menu select Offset From Feature….
Feature…. The
Offset From Feature form
Feature form appears, enter the offset value in relation to the direction of the axis selected, in
this case -500mm
case -500mm and
and click the OK
OK button. Move the cursor over the P-point that the component needs to
be offset from. When P-point is selected the component will be offset by the value entered on the form. As
shown here for PIPE
PIPE /100-B-8.
/100-B-8.
The Offset From Feature… can

The Offset Feature… can also be used to allow for the tube outside diameter and any insulation as
shown previously.
previously. Shown here for PIPE
PIPE /150-A-57.
/150-A-57.
The offse
offsett valu
value
e enter
enterre
red
d can
can be set
set ag
agai
ains
nstt the
the
cent
centre
reli
line
ne of the
the tube,
tube, the ou
outsi
tside
de di
diamt
amter
er or the
the
insulation.
 The result of the Offset

result the Offset From Feature… function is dependent upon the initial direction of the handle
selected. In the above instance the Model
the Model Editor handle
handle had been orientated so that the axis direction
of the handle selected was Up
Up..

5.1
5.1.13
.13 Move
Move Usin
Using
g Snap
Snap to Poi
Point
nt
Holding the cursor over the Editor handle

handle and from the right click menu select Snap
select Snap to Point….
Point…. Move the
cursor over the P-Point to snap to, the P-Point will be displayed and the part will be displayed in its new
position. If the position is correct indicate the P-point.
5.1.14
5.1.14 Change
Change Len
Length
gth Us
Using
ing Edi
Editor
tor
Using the Model
the Model Editor handles
handles it is possible to move a section of a branch and at the same time change
the lengths of the connected legs to suit.
Selecting the implied tube in the leg of the branch will also
highli
highlight
ght the rel
relevan
evantt compone
components
nts.. In thi
this
s case
case the Ctrl
button has been used to also capture the leg the branch in
the East/West
the East/West axis.
axis.
Selecting the axis to modify the length with a left click. Repositioning the cursor to achieve the required
offset and left clicking again will set the position and also adjust the adjacent legs.

5.1.1
5.1.15
5 Moving
Moving Single
Single / Multiple
Multiple Pipes using Edito
Editor
r
It is possible to move a single pipeline or multiple pipelines using the Editor by

by selecting them from the
the 3D
View.. Thi
View This
s is done
done ei
eith
ther
er by fenci
fencing
ng the it
items
ems by hold
holdin
ing
g down
down the leleft
ft mou
mousese butto
button
n and trap
trappi
ping
ng
everything inside a window or by holding down the Ctrl
the Ctrl key
key on the keyboard and indicating each item.
Select the handle that the direction the pipes

are to be mov moved in with a left click.
Reposition the cursor to achieve the desired
offset and left click again to set the position.
 Ca
Care
re mu
must
st be ta
take
ken
n wh
when
en us
usin
ing
g th
the
e
fencing in approach on a 3D
a 3D View that
that
contains numerous elements. It may be
advi
advisa
sabl
ble
e to cr
crea
eate
te a ne
new w 3D Vi
View
ew
contai
containin
ningg onl
only
y tho
those
se elem
element
ents s to be
moved.
The Rotational handle

handless are also
also act
active
ive to
allow the rotation of the pipe if required.

5.2 Quic
ick
k Pipe Router
The Quick Pipe Router

Router can be considered to be a mode of the Editor . The mode is activated by single
clicking the ‘dotted’ line of an incomplete route whilst the Editor is also active, or by double clicking when
Editor is
is not active.
The Quick
The Quick Pipe Router handle
handle has three representations:-

Extend Route
Route handle - This is used
used to extend the rou
route
te in the direction
direction indicated
indicated by the handl
handle.
e.
 Cardinal
Cardinal Direction
Direction handles - These are
are used to change the direction
direction of the routing
routing to one of the
cardinal directions from the current frame of reference.
 Rotational
Rotational handle
handles
s - These allow the extended route
route handle to be interacti
interactively
vely direc
directed.
ted.

Router handle is used to define a routing vector within the constraints of the currently
selected ‘badly’ defined route. A ‘badly’ defined route is defined in general terms as follows-
 There is a misalignment
misalignment between two
two components
components
 The head or tail of a branch is incomple

incomplete,
te, i.e. where
where the head/tail
head/tail attribu
attributes
tes are left in their
default state
 The head/tail
head/tail is positioned
positioned but not connected and the head/tail
head/tail connection
connection type is unset
unset..
This usually equates to the dotted line representation of the implied tube, where the implied tube cannot be
drawn. An exception to the above could be where a pipe branch does not have specification reference set.
The handle can be moved by clicking the primary mouse button. By default the handle will move in multiples
of the currently defined linear increments. If the secondary mouse button is clicked as the cursor is over the
pipe routing handle a context sensitive menu will appear. The menu will display the available options which
relate to the modification.

5.2
5.2.1
.1 Fittin
Fitting
g to Fit
Fittin
ting
g Fun
Functi
ctiona
onalit
lity
y
The Quick Pipe

Pipe Router
Router has fitt
fitting
ing to fit
fittin
ting
g functi
functiona
onality
lity that pro
provide
vides
s the visual
visual feedbac
feedback
k to determi
determine
ne
whether there is enough space for an elbow or bend.
Clicking the Extend Route handle will display the Distance Feedback value and fitting to fitting information in
the 3D View.
the 3D View . This displays
displays how the current cursor position relates to the elbow/bend dimensi
dimension.
on.
The
The in init
itia
iall posi
positi
tion
on of the
the hand
handle
le wi
will
ll di
disp
spla
lay
y the
the
select
sel ected
ed Distanc
Distancee Feedback
Feedback value
value fol
follow
lowed
ed by ‘One
‘One
fitting’. This will be the case until the length of tube is
great enough to accommodate
accommodate the elbow/bend.
elbow/bend.
Clic
icki
king
ng the
the le
left
ft mous
mousee butto
utton
n at thi
this stag
stage
e wililll
automatically increase the leg length to allow for a 90
degree elbow/bend.
Posi
Positi
tion
onin
ing
g the
the ha
hand
ndle
le be
bey
yond
ond the
the cent
centre
re to face
face
dimension of the elbow/bend will display the resultant
tube length.
 In all cases it is assumed that the next elbow/bend

elbow/bend
will be 90 deg
will egre
rees
es.. Ho
How
wevever
er ththe
e va
vallue
uess ar
are
e
corre
correct
ctly
ly ca
calc
lcul
ulat
ated
ed to all
allow
ow fo
forr an al
alter
terna
nati
tive
ve
angle from the previous component.
The elbow/bend will not have the correct representation until the subsequent direction has been determined.

The subsequent repositioning of the cursor will once again indicate the resulting length of tube between the
two fittings.
If the elbow/bend is to be connected directly to the existing component it is not necessary to move the
handle in the leave/arrive direction of the previous/next component. Instead the required direction axis can
be selected immediately making the procedure
procedure more
m ore efficient
efficient..

5.2
5.2.2
.2 Quick
Quick Pipe
Pipe Rout
Routing
ing Usin
Using
g Elbows
Elbows – (Wor
(Worked
ked Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)

Router will allow the definition of the pipe route wherever there is a ‘badly’ defined route
within a branch, i.e. where the dotted pipe frame is displayed instead of implied tube.
Create Pipe
Pipe /150-B-6
/150-B-6 and Branch
Branch /150-B
/150-B-6/B
-6/B1
1 below
ZONE
ZON E ZONE-PI
ZONE-PIPING
PING-AR
-AREA01
EA01 usi
using the followllowiing
information:-
 Pr
Prim
imar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process System B
 Bore = 150mm
Connect the head to C1101/N5

to C1101/N5 and
and the tail to E1302B/N1
to E1302B/N1..
Add weld neck flanges to the head and tail.
Double click the the dotted pipe frame line. The Quick Pipe Router
handle will now appear at the leave of the component.
Right click the Extend Route handle and from the

select Component Choice > Use Elbows
menu select Component Elbows..

Click the Extend Route Handle in the

East direction. Position the cursor to
ex
exte
tend
nd the leg by 110
1100mm
0mm and
and le
left
ft
click again.
This will
This will cre
create
ate an elbow
elbow connec
connected
ted
di
dire
rect
ctly
ly to the
the flang
flange
e an
and
d a ‘b
‘blo
lob’
b’ to
represent a second elbow.
Left click the Down

the Down Extend
Extend Route handle. Position the cursor to extend the leg 500mm and left click again to
complete the elbow.
To switch
switch the Quick
Quick Pipe
Pipe Router
Router handle
handle to
the
the ar
arri
rive
ve of the flan
flange
ge at the
the tail,
tail, click
click the
the
single handle at this connection.
Left
Left clic
click
k the
the West Extend
Extend Route
Route handle
handle,,
position the cursor to extend the 800mm and
click the left button again to create two elbows
as shown.
Ente
Enterr the
the feat
featur
ure
e hi
high
ghli
ligh
ghti
ting
ng mo
mode
de by
pressing the
the F key on the keyboard or on the
Tools tab,
tab, in thethe Controls group
group clic
click
k the
the
Feature Highlighting button.
Highlighting button.

Left click on the North

the North direction
direction Extend
Extend Route handle
Route handle and move the cursor
towards the handle at elbows previously created at the head of the branch. A
proposed
propos ed route for completion
completion will be displayed
displayed translucently
translucently..
select Complete from
Click the right mouse button and select Complete from the context sensitive
menu that appears.
The elbows and implied tube are added to

complete the route.
 The elbows that have been added

automatically can later be changed to a bend
or an alternative elbow.

5.
5.2.
2.3
3 Pipe
Pipe Ro
Rout
utin
ing
g Us
Using
ing Be
Bend
nds
s
Typically pulled bends are used on smaller bore pipe routes in the Plant industry. If bends are to be used
instead of elbows the bend radius applied must obtained from either the specification, as is the case for
A1A, or from a pipe fabrication machine.
If bend
bends
s are
are to be usesedd inste
nstead
ad of elelb
bows,
ows, th
the
e pi
pipe
pe sp
spec
ec,, zone,
one, pi
pipe
pe or br
bra
anch
nch must
must have
ave the
the
BendMacReference attribute
BendMacReference attribute set. The BendMacReference
The BendMacReference must
must point to a valid Fabrication Machine World
(FMWL), Fabrication
Fabrication Machine Group (FMGRP) or Fabrica
Fabrication
tion Machine (FMBEND).
In th
the
e TrTrai
aini
ning
ng pr
proj
ojec
ectt th
ther
ere
e is a sing
single
le Fa
Fabr
bric
icat
atio
ion
n Mach
Machin
inee Wor
World
ld,,
Fab_Machines which owns two Fabrication Machine Groups, Bending_5D
Groups, Bending_5D
and Bending_3D.
Bending_3D. Ea Each
ch of the
the Fab
Fabri
rica
cati
tion
on Ma
Machchine
ine Group
Groupss owns
owns two
two
bending
ben ding machine
machines,
s, an ext
extrusi
rusion
on mach
machine
ine and a flange
flange weldin
welding
g machine
machine..
This arrangement can be customised to suit the customers’ requirements.
For instance there may be more than one FMWL or FMGRP to allow for
differentt locations
differen locations of the bending machines, i.e. different
different fabrication shops.
 In order for the pipe to be bent on the bending machine the comptype
comptype attribute
attribute on the variable angle /
variable radius bend must be set to VAR in Paragon
in Paragon..
There are several criteria that can be checked

to ensu
ensurere the
the pi
pipe
pe ca can
n be bent
bent,, ou
outs
tsid
idee
diamet
meter, wall thi hic
ckne
kness and ma matteri
ria
al
reference. However it is not essential for wall
thickness and material reference to be allowed
for if they
they are not requi
required
red.. This
This pr
prov
ovid
ides
es a
flexible approach to the set up
 The administration of the FMWL, FMGRP and FMBEND elements is covered in TM-2229 AVEVA
Marine (12.1) Pipe Fabrication training guide.
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.1 Ass
Assigning
igning the Bendin
Bending
g Machine
Machine
 Th
The
e fo
folllo
lowi
wing
ng se
sect
ctio
ion
n co
cove
vers
rs th
the
e as
assi
sig
gnm
nmen
entt of the
BendMacReference from within Model . It is also possible to
assign this attribute for a specific pipe specification. Refer to
TM-1840
TM-184 0 AVEVA Everything3D (2.1) Piping Catalo Catalogues
gues and
Specifications training guide.
If the FMWL or FMGRP is assigned as the BendMacReference the

BendMacReference the system will apply the radius of the first
bending machine in the hierarchy. For example, using the hierarchy shown above, if the FMWL is assigned
then the system will attempt to add 5D bends. In order to achieve a 3D bend either the FMGRP or FMBEND
that owns the 3D data must be assigned. For this reason the structure of the FMWL should be carefully
considered.
 At this stage in the work flow the only aim is to create a ben
bend
d with the corr
correct
ect radius
radius that can be ben
bent
t
later. The assignment of the actual bending machine that will perform the task can be carried out later.

5.2.3
5.2.3.2
.2 Addin
Adding
g Bends
Bends Using the Form
Bends can be added in the same fashion as elbows using the Piping Component Editor form Editor form and then
manipulated using the Modify
the Modify tab,
tab, but clearly this is not as efficient as using the Quick Pipe Router .
From the Standard
the Standard Component
Component section click
Bend button.
the Bend
the button.
The form changes to show the available bends.
If a be
bend
ndin
ing
g machi
machinene has
has been
been as
assi
sign
gned
ed the
the
Radius opti
option
on fr
from
om the
the Bend Informat
Information
ion
sectio
sec tion
n default
defaults
s to Machine and
and the
the valu
value
e is
greyed out preventing modification.
The priority is to check the zone, pipe or branch

element for a Fabrication Machine i.e. that the
BendM
BendMacacRe
Refer
feren
ence
ce attri
attribu
bute
te is set
set to a vali
valid
d
Fabrication
Fabrication Machine World, Group or Machine.
Machine.
The hierarchy is searched below the

BendMacReference to
BendMacReference to find an appropriate tube
outside diameter.
 If no ma
matc
tchi
hing
ng di
dime
mensi
nsion
ons
s ar
are
e fo
foun
und
d th
the
e
radius cannot be set, requiring the radius to
be set by the user.
 The A150 specification

specification also contains
contains mitred bends with a differi
differing
ng numbers of cuts as an alternative to
machine bends.

5.2.4 Pipe Rout

Routing
ing Using
Using Bend
Bends
s - Fabric
Fabrication
ation Mach
Machine
ine – (Worke
(Worked
d Example
Example))
Create Pipe /40-B-10 and Branch /40-B-10/B1 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following
information:-
 Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process Head Details:-
Details:-
System B
 Connection
Connection Type = Open End

Specification = A3B  Direction = E
 Bore = 40mm
 Position:-
 W 312700
 N 300800
 U 102135
Tail Details:-
Details:-
 Connection
 Direction = W

Position:-
 W 303000
 N 309080
 U 105000 (Thi
(This
s is an ararbi
bitr
trar
ary
y
val
alu
ue which will be update ated
according
accord ing to the route obtained).
obtained).
From the Model right click on the pipe and select Attributes… T

the Model Explorer right Attributes… The
he Attributes
Attributes form
form will appear.
Set the BendMacReference
the BendMacReference attribute
attribute by entering Bending_3D
entering Bending_3D.. As explained previously this is the name of
the Fabrication Machine Group (FMGRP).
 Set
Settin
ting
g the BendMacReference attri
attribute
bute to the Fabr
Fabrica
icatio
tion
n Ma
Machin
chine
e Gro
Group
up wil
willl resu
result
lt in the first
suitable bending machine in the hierarchy to be used, in this case FMBEND 3_NB_MACH.

The route can now be completed using the assigned Right click on the Extend
the Extend Route handle
Route handle pointing
bending machine. Double click on the dotted of the in
in E select Component Choice >
E direction and select Component
branch to invoke the Quick
the Quick Pipe Router . Use Bends from
Bends from the menu.
Using
Using the Extend
Extend Route
Route hand
handle
le at the
the head
head
po
posi
siti
tion
on the curso
cursorr to achie
achieve
ve the di
dimen
mensision
ons
s
shown.
Add GENSEC
GENSEC 3 belongi
belonging
ng to FRMW /AXIS_P1.3
/AXIS_P1.3 owne
owned
d by STRU
/PIPERACK from
/PIPERACK from SITE
SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Once again the existing features can be used as a reference in order to

determine the dimensions of the pipe route. Using the axis handle select
Offset From Feature … from
from the right click
click menu.
menu. The Offset
Offset From
Feature form
Feature of -500mm and
form appears, enter a value of -500mm and click the OK
the OK button.
 Th
This
is va
valu
lue
e wi
will
ll be app
appli
lied
ed to an
any
y su
subs
bsequ
equen
entt pos
posit
itio
ions
ns un
until
til an
alternative
alternative function is selecte
selected
d or the Editor
the Editor is
is de-activated.

Place the cursor over the underside of GENSEC

of GENSEC 3
and
and se
sellect
ect the
the ai
aid
d lalabe
bellle
led
d Tube
Tube clearanc
clearance
e
500mm from Linear Edge.
Edge.
Using the North
the North axis
axis handle select Extend
select Extend
Through Feature … from
… from the right click menu.
 Thi
This
s is ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y be
beca
caus
use
e th
the
e pr
prev
evio
ious
us
Offset From Fea
Offset Feature
ture functi
function
on will result in
the offset value being applied to any features
indicated when positioning the handle.
Indicate the handle at the tail.


Ensure Feature Highlig

Ensure Feature Highlighting
hting mode
mode is on, (press
F key
the F
the key to toggle). Using the left mouse button
click the Up
the Up axis
axis handle and position the cursor
over the top of GENSEC
GENSEC 3.3. Sselect the aid labelled
Tube clearance 0mm behind Linear Edge to Edge to
place the underside of the tube on top of the steel.
The O hotkey can be used to cycle through the
The O
possible results with Feature Highlighting active.
 The graphical positioning

positioning of the handle
handles
s with
Feature Highlig
Highlighting
hting activ
active
e ac
achi
hieve
eves
s th
the
e
same result as the Exten Extend
d ThrThroug
oughh
Feature… from
Feature… from the right click menu.
Click the Modify
the Modify > Pipe
> Pipe button
button to display the Pipe
the Pipe
Editor: Modify Pipe form.
Pipe form. This will add the aids
for the head and tail to the 3D View.
View.
Using the East
the East axis select Extend
axis handle select Extend
Through Feature … from
… from the right click menu.
Indicate the aid at the tail to obtain the correct East

position.
The route will now be complete with the exception

that there are too many bends present and the tail
position is incorrect.

Select the Branch
the Branch Tail tab
Tail tab on the Pipe
the Pipe Editor:
Modify Pipe form. the Connect To Last
Pipe form. Click the Connect
Member button
button and deactivate the Editor
the Editor by
by
pressing the Escape
the Escape key.
key.
This will position the tail correctly and remove

the additional unwanted bend.
5.3 Changin
Changing
g to Alte
lterna
rnativ
tive
e Fab
Fabric
ricati
ation
on Mac
Machin
hine
e Ben
Bend
d – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
If the bend radius needs to be changed for design reasons, then the BendMacReference attribute
BendMacReference attribute for the
zone, pipe or branch can be changed to another Fabrication Machine World (FMWL), Group (FMGRP) or
Machine (FMBEND)
Naviga
Navigate
te to the PIPE /40-B-1
/40-B-100 and and set the BendMacReference attrib
attribute
ute for
for the
the branc
branch
h to the
the 5D
FMGRP, /Bending_5D
FMGRP, /Bending_5D using
using the Attributes
the Attributes form.
form.
Navigate
Navigate to BEND1 via
via the
the Model Explor
Explorer
er or
Component
Compone nt Sequence List.

From the Reselect tta ab of the Piping

Component
Compone nt Editor
Editor form
form clic
click
k the BEND
the BEND #S
entry in the list.
A Question form appears, enquiring “Bend

Radius is 114.3mm - Do You want to change
the Bend Radius to 190.5mm - Machine
Defined ” click the Yes
the Yes button.
Th
Thee be
bend
nd ra
radi
dius
us is chchan
ange
ged
d to suit
suit the
the new
new
fabrication machine settings. This process could
be re
repe
peat
ated
ed for
for al
alll the
the re
requ
quir
ired
ed be
bend
nds
s an
and
d
elbows
elbow s within
within the branch.

Exercise 5 – Quick Pipe Router – /100-C-13
Add STRU /PIPERACK

/PIPERACK belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURA
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREAL-AREA0101 and EQUI /1301 belonging to
SITE /SITE-EQ
/SITE-EQUIPMENT-
UIPMENT-AREAAREA01 01 to the 3D View.
View . Create Pipe /100-C-13 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-
AREA01 using
AREA01 using the following information:-
 Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process System C Head Details:-
Details:-
 Specification = F1C  Connected to E1301/NS2

to E1301/NS2
 Bore = 100mm
Tail Detail
Details
s:-
 Connection
Connection Type = Open
 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 308280
 U 105000 (This
105000 (This is an
arbitrary value which will be
updated according to the
route obtained).

Use Quick Pipe Router with

Use Quick with elbows to complete
the route ensuring that the horizontal legs are
resting on the pipe rack as shown.
Complete the tail position using the Connect

the Connect To
Last Member button.
button.
CHAPTER 6
6 Slop
Slopin
ing
g Pi
Pipe
pes
s
The previous chapters involved only orthogonal pipelines, that is, all lengths of tube were either horizontal or
verti
vertical
cal.. In pract
practic
ice,
e, it is a req
requi
uire
remen
mentt to in
incl
clude
ude le
leng
ngth
ths
s of tube
tube,, wh
whic
ich
h slop
slope
e at angle
angles
s betwe
betweenen
components.
components. This chapter
chapter describes
describes how to position
position and manipulate
manipulate sloping pipework.
6.1 Slopin
Sloping
g Co
Compo
mponen
nents
ts Us
Using
ing the Mod
Modify
ify Fun
Functi
ctions
ons..
The slope of the component can be set using the Modify

the Modify tab
tab of the Piping
form.
The Modify tab shows the current setting of the of the

slope.
This can be changed by setting an alternative mode from

the options list.
The appearance of the icon will then change to suit the

new setting.
No Slope
Slope Down
Slope Up
The use of the Slope Down and Slope

and Slope Up modes relies upon a Slope Reference being present for the
current Branch.
If the user attempts to apply a slope on a component without

ha
haviving
ng a sl
slop
opee at the
the Br
Bran
anch
ch le
leve
vell then
then a Message form
appears.
Setting
Setting eit
either Slope
her the Slope Up or
or Slo
Slope
pe Do
Down
wn modes
modes wil
willl
display the Current
the Current Slope options.
Slope options.
The user can select an alternative Current Slope value from

th
the
e optio
options
ns list
list if req
requi
uired
red.. The Current
Current Slope
Slope value
value tha
thatt
correspomds with the Slope
the Slope Reference of
Reference of the current Branch
can easily be identified.
identified.

Once the slope mode has been set the slope is applied by clicking the relevant direction. The slope can then
be seen on the 3D
the 3D View as
View as an aid.
The Direction
slope values are textb
textbox
ox .and the Arri
updated.
updated Arrive/
ve/Leav
Leave
e
In this case the angle of the Elbow has been

modified.
modifie d. Consequently
Consequently adding components
components to
this
this Elbow
Elbow will prod
produc
ucee a slop
slopin
ing
g le
leg
g in the
the
branch.
The new elbow has had a slope applied in the

South
South dir
direct
ection
ion.. Conseq
Consequent
uently
ly both the Arri
Arrive
ve
and Leave connections are sloping.
The same method can be used to slope to slope a connection from

an nozzle. In this case the flange is horizontal but the connection
away from the P2 is sloping.
 In this case the normal diorect

diorection
ion for the P2 would be Nor
North.
th.
This derived direction in relation to the slope is possible due to
the OffTolerance val
value
ue that is sesett on th
the
e PTA
TAXX of the
component
compon ent in the catalogue.

This is also the case for a Tee placed in the

vertical leg of a branch requires a slope away
from the P3.
In this case the Slope Down mode needs to

set to direct the P3. This does not affect the
Direction value
value in the textbox
textbox beca
because
use this
relates to the P2 but it can be seen that the
Branch value has changed.
changed.
By de
defa
faul
ultt the
the P3 of a slop
slopin
ing
g Te
Tee e wi
will
ll be
angled. This slope can be removed by setting
the
the slop
slopee mode
mode and clicki
clicking the U (or
ng the (or D)
direction.
Once ag
Once agai
ain
n this
this wi
will
ll in
intr
trod
oduc
uce
e an offs
offset
et
between the originl of the Tee and the P3.
 In both of the
these
se cases the Off
OffTol
Tolera
erance
nce
value has been used for the P3 of the
Tee.

6.
6.2
2 Crea
Creatin
ting
g a Sl
Slop
opin
ing
g Pi
Pipe
pe – (W
(Wor
orke
ked
d Ex
Exam
ampl
ple)
e)
Create Pipe
Create Pipe /100-C-16 below
/100-C-16 below ZONE
ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using
/ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using the following information:-
 Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
Details:-
System C
 Connected to E1302A/NS2
to E1302A/NS2
Tail Details:-
Details:-
 Bore = 100mm
 Connection
 Direction = W
 Slope Ref = /1in100
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 307400
 U 106434mm
Us
Usee the
the Sl
Slop
ope
e Up butt
button
on to se
sett the
the Direction
correctly.

Connect a #150 WN Flange and Gasket at the head.
Create an Elbow connected to the Flange.
From the Modify

Modify tab reposition the Elbow 1000mm
from the Flange.

Select the Slope Down mode and with the default

1in100 Curren
Currentt Sl
Slope
ope valu
value
e se
set,
t, cli
click the
the E
direction.
Copy the extsti

extsting
ng Elbow
Elbow and reposi
repositio
tion
n it 1650mm
1650mm
from the previous.

The newly created elbow should now be directed North in order to obtain a slope running Soutn to North.
Click the N direction.
Copy the existing Elbow and click the Branch Tail

button.
Because the branch leg is sloping there is more than one solution. Consequently the Plane Through form
Through form is
the OK button.
displayed. Select the solution for the North plane and click the OK

the D axis
Click the D axis on the Direction
the Direction tool.
tool.
Copy the existing Elbow and click the E axis on the

Direction tool.
Direction tool.
Click the Branch
the Branch Tail button.
Through form is displayed. Select the solution for the sloping plane and click the OK
The Plane Through OK button
button to
complete the route.


6.
6.3
3 Retr
Retros
ospe
pect
ctiv
ive
e Sl
Slop
oping
ing of Pi
Pipe
pes
s
It ha
has
s al
alre
ready
ady been seen howhow a Slope
Slope Ref
Ref can
can be ap
appl
plie
ied
d to the
the compo
componenent
nts
s as they
they are crea
createted.
d.
Alternativley the slope can be applied to an orthogonally routed pipe retrospectively via the
the Slope
Slope Pipe form.
Pipe form.
Click the Slope
the Slope Pipe
Pipe button
button from Tools
from Tools group
group to open
the form.
 Thi
This
s will open a floating
floating form over the top of the
3D View .
The upper left side of the form allows the setting of
th
the
e sl
slop
ope
directly e by
or byentering
ei
eithe
therr are
refer
feren
enci
value.cing
ng the
the branc
branch
h slope
slope
The
The slop
slopee ca
can
n be de defi
fine
ned
d as a ra rati
tio,
o, angl
angle
e or
percentage and can slope be Up
be Up or Down,
Down, in relation
to the direction of flow.
Th
Thee for
form empl
mploys
oys a Forwards and
Backwards mode to determine how the
slope is to be applied. The button depicts
the current mode.
It is al
also
so po
poss
ssib
ible
le to Slope
Slope Ind
Indivi
ividu
dual
al Le
Legs
gs as
opposed to the whole pipe.
The form contains a list of branch legs, indicating the

start, finish, the fall as a result of the proposed slope
and the length. The selected leg is highlighted in the
3D View on
View on the form.
 It is not essential
essential to have the Slope Ref set to be able to use this form.


The secti
section
on below
below the
the list
list pr
prov
ovid
ides
es in
info
forma
rmati
tion
on an
and
d
tools to manipulate the selected leg.
The appli
applicati
cation
on of the slopes will modify
modify the vertic
vertical
al
legs of the pipe try to obtain the slope. As a result, the
alteration of a vertical leg directly from the form is not
possible. Instead, it is often altered as a consequence
of other legs being modified.
Sele
Select
ctin
ing
g a leleg
g that
that is not
not verti
vertica
call fro
from
m the
the list
list will
will
update the area under the list to show the details of the
le
leg.
g. This
This al
allo
lows
ws al
alter
terati
ation
on of the
the slop
slopee or re
remov
moval
al
completely
comple tely by unchecking
unchecking the Slope
the Slope Leg check
Leg check box.
The Anchors se section of the form allows

feature
features/p
s/posi
osition
tions
s of the select
selected
ed leg to be fixed.
fixed. By
default the head and tail of the branch will always be
fixed and these are depicted as the Start/
Start/Finish
Finish of
of the
relevant Leg automatically.
the Add Anchor

Anchors are added by clicking on the Add
button. Additional information is then required for the
anchor definition
definition to be complete.
complete.
There are four anchor Types available for selection from the options list:-
 Start –
Start – The start position of the leg is to be maintained.
 Finish –
Finish – The finish position of the leg is to be maintained.

Component
Component – – The position of a component in relation to another
feature is to be used.
 Position – A position along the leg is to be used in relation to

another feature.
Setting an anchor at the start of the leg will automatically add an anchor to the
finish of the previous leg and vice versa if the anchor is set at the finish.
Further consideration needs to be given to the additional options that are available when the Component
and Position
and Position options
options are employed. They are very similar in application, both requiring the indication of an
element to which the component/leg can be anchored.

Anchors that have been added can be removed by

se
sele
lecti
cting
ng them
them from
from the
the list
list an
and
d clic
clicki
king
ng the
the Delete
Anchor button.
button.
If the proposed settings on the form will lead to an

erroneous result a warning symbol will appear in the
Branch Legs list.
Legs list.
To fu
furt
rthe
herr ininve
vest
stig
igat
ate
e an
any
y er
erro
rors
rs clic
click the Show
k the
Messages butbutton. Thi
This opens the Slop
Slopee Pipe
Pipe
Messages form
Messages form as shown.
This
This will
will di
disp
splay
lay the
the Slope
Slope Pipe Message
Messages
s form
form as
shown.
When using the Slope

the Slope Pipe no
Pipe no changes are committed to the database until the Apply button
Apply button
is clicked. Changes in the calculations that are performed by the form can be reversed or
reinstated using the Undo
the Undo Calculation and
Calculation and Redo Calculation buttons
Calculation buttons

6.4 Retro
Retrospe
spect
ctive
ive Slo
Sloping
ping of Pip
Pipes
es – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
Add Pipe /100-C-16

/100-C-16 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-A
/ZONE-PIPING-AREA01
REA01 and STRU /PIPERACK
/PIPERACK belonging
belonging to SITE
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to the 3D View.
View .
Navigate
Navigate to pipe /100-C-16
pipe /100-C-16 and
and click the Tools > Slope
the Tools > Slope
Pipe button.
Pipe button.
This pipe is already sloping as a result of the previous
worked example. This worked example will alter the slope of
a single leg and use the finish point of the leg as an anchor.
Add STRU
Add STRU /PIPERACK belonging
/PIPERACK belonging to SITE
to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 to
the 3D View of
View of the form.
Click the Clear
the Clear
Canvas button.
Canvas button.
Check the Slop

Check Slope e Indi
Individu
vidual
al Legs checkbox
checkbox and
select Leg
select Leg 3 from
3 from the Branch
the Branch Legs list.
Legs list.

The slope of this leg needs to be increased, enter a

value of 50 in
50 in the Slope
the Slope (1 in) text
in) text box.
It can be seen from the 3D

the 3D View that
View that this will cause a
clash between
between Leg
Leg 3 and GENSEC
GENSEC 5 of of FRMW
ROW_P1.A.. In order to overcome this, the finish of
ROW_P1.A
the leg needs to be anchored.
With Leg
With Leg 3
3 selected
selected click the Add
the Add Anchor button.
button.
Select Finish
Select Finish from
from the Type
the Type options
options list.

This will add an anchor to the finish of Leg 3 and the

start of Leg 4.
It can be seen from the 3D

the 3D View that
View that Leg
Leg 3 no
3 no
longer clashes with GENSEC
with GENSEC 5 of
5 of FRMW
FRMW
ROW_P1.A and
ROW_P1.A and the finish position of the leg has
been maintained.
the Apply button
Click the Apply button to complet
complete
e the modification
modification
followed by the OK
the OK button to close the form.

Exercise 6 – Creating Sloping Pipes - /100-C-17
Add STRU /PIPERACK

/PIPERACK belonging
belonging to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURA
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA0
L-AREA01 1 to the 3D View.
View. Create Pipe
/100-C-17 below ZONE
/100-C-17 below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using
System
Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
Sy
C stem
Details:-
Connected to E1302B/NS1
 to E1302B/NS1
Tail Details:-
Details:-
 Bore = 100mm
 Connection
 Direction = W
 Slope Ref = /1in100
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 307600
 U 106300 (This
(This is an arbit
arbitra
rary
ry valu
value
e
which will be updated according to the
route obtained).
The pipe is to be positioned so that it is supported on the STRU /PIPERACK.

/PIPERACK.

Use the Select
the Select and
and Modify
Modify tabs
tabs to create and position the first three Elbows at the Head of the Branch.
The easiest method of achieveing the 500mm offset using the 45 degree
Elbow is to use 90 degree Elbows initially and then modify /ELBO2 and
/ELBO3 retrospectively.
With the Default
the Default Slope Down
Down set
set and Feature Highlighting (F
(F) on, /ELBO
on, /ELBO 4
4 can be positioned so that the
sloping tube rests on the TOS using the Quick
the Quick Pipe Router . When the cursor is positioned over edge of the
steel the aid will appear to select the required clearance. Using the P hotkey will toggle between Linear
Edge and Sloped Linear Edge.
Edge. Select the aid when labelled Tube Clearance 0mm in front of sloped
Linear Edge.
Edge.
Repeat the same procedure in order to determine the height for /ELBO

for /ELBO 6.
6.
 Th
This
is is no
nott po
possi
ssibl
ble
e to ac
achi
hiev
eve
e us
usin
ing
g th
the
e bu
butt
ttons
ons shown
shown so far on the
the Modify
Modify tab. It can only be
achieved using the Editor
the Editor functions.
functions.


CHAPTER 7
7 Pipework
Pipework Spec
Spec/Bore
/Bore Modif
Modificati
ication
on
7.1 Pipewo
Pipework
rk Com
Compon
ponen
entt Bor
Bore
e and Spe
Specif
cifica
icatio
tion
n Mod
Modifi
ifica
cation
tion
This utility provides a method for modification of the bore or specifications of one or all of the components in
a pipe or branch. In addition to these modifications, the utility also allows the setting of insulation and tracing
specs. The same Modify
same Modify Components
Components form is used for modifying
modifying both component
component specification
specification and bore.
To display the Modify
the Modify Components
Components form; navigate to the required
pipe or one of its branches and in the Modify
Modify group
group select the
Spec/Bore > Pipe or
Pipe or Branch button.
Branch button.
7.1.1
7.1.1 Modi
Modify
fy Co
Comp
mpon
onen
ents
ts Fo
Form
rm
The Modify Components form is a multi-function form capable of changing both specifications and bores.
The Modify
The illustration below show the result of opening the form using Pipe /150-A-57
Pipe /150-A-57..
The Modify Components

The Modify Components form consists of three tabs, the Component
the Component List tab
List tab is the main tab which has
the following functions at the top of the form:-
 CE
CE -
- allows navigation to another pipe or branch and updates the form accordingly
 Select
Select from
from 3D View
View – allows the selection of a group of components in the 3D View and
highlights
highlights them on the Modify
the Modify Components form.
Components form.
 Insulation Spec
Spec –
– checking this will display an additional column on the Modify Components
Components
listing the insulation that is applied to the component.
 Tracing Spec
Spec - - checking this will display an additional column on the Modify Components
listing the insulation that is applied to the component.


The component list that dominates the remainder of the form has the following columns:-
 Design Element – These are the components

components in the selected
selected pipe or branch
 Component Description – These

These description
description of the
the component
component
 PBORE1 …2 …3 – The bore at the relevant

relevant PPoint of the component
component
 Spec Component
Component – The current specificatio
specification
n reference
reference of the component
component
 New Spec Component

Component – The new specification
specification referen
reference
ce of the component
component
 New Component – The new description of the component

Description
 New PBORE1
PBORE1 …2 …3 – The new bore of the component
component
The Apply changes to like components checkbox

The Apply components checkbox will force any changes that are made to a component to
all instances of the same component in the list. This is very useful when applying changes to numerous
components of the same type without having to ensure that all instances have been selected on the form.
7.1.
7.1.2
2 Comp
Compon
onen
entt Se
Sele
lect
ction
ion
A series of components can be selected graphically by fencing in the components and then clicking the
Se
Selec
lectt fr
from
om 3D Vie
View
w button
button.. This accepts
accepts the selection
selection and highlig
highlights
hts the compone
components
nts in the list
list of
components.
Compone
Compo nent
nts
s can
can be added
added or remov
removeded from
from th
the
e sele
selecti
ction
on by ho
hold
ldin
ing
g down
down the
the Ctrl/
Ctrl/Shift keys
keys and
selecting/deselecting components from the list.
 In the Design
the Design Element column
column of the
the Modify Components form,
Components form, it can be seen that every component
has a Leave Tube element. This includes elements which do not physically have a leave tube, such as
gaskets, flanged valves etc. This is because AVEVA E3D requires each component to have a LSTU
(Leave Specification Tube) attribute. Although the leave tube for these elements is zero length, they are
still shown on this form to allow the specification to be changed to match the adjoining components.


7.1.2
7.1.2.1
.1 Modific
Modification
ation Option
Options
s
The options are accessed from the right click menu over
a selected field. In each case the modify option applies
only to the highlighted items.
 Modify Specification - Modi

Modifie
fies
s tthe
he specifi
specificat
cation
ion of tthe
he compone
components
nts sel
selecte
ected
d iin
n the
the
list.
 Modify Bore - Modifies

Modifies the bore of the components
components select
selected
ed in the list.
 Modify Insula
Insulation
tion Spec - Modi
Modifi
fies
es the insula
insulatio
tion
n spec
specifi
ifica
cati
tion
on of the
the compo
compone
nent
nts
s
selected in the list.
 Modify Tracing Spec - Modifies

Modifies the tracing specification
specification of the compone
components
nts select
selected
ed
in the list.

Select Component - All
Allows
ows the sel
selecti
ection
on of an equi
equival
valent
ent compone
component
nt where
where the
modification process fails to offer a component complying with
the new specification or bore.
 Select All - Selects

Selects all of the components
components in the list.
 Clear New Specifications - Cl

Clears
ears the entrie
entries
s for the
the Selected or
or All
All components in the
list allowing
allowing the selection process to be restarted.
 Export to Excel - All

Allows
ows the conten
contents
ts of the com
compon
ponent
ents
s lis
listt to be saved
saved as an
Excel file.
 Print Preview - Presents

Presents a print preview of the component
component list.
7.1.3
7.1.3 Modify
Modifying
ing Com
Compon
ponent
ent Spe
Specif
cifica
ication
tions
s
To modify the specification of a set of components, select the Modify

Specification optio
option
n fro
from
m the
the ri
righ
ghtt clic
click
k men
menu.
u. The Select
Select Piping
Piping
Spec form
Spec form is displayed.
The desired specification can be set from the Specification

Specification options
options list.
How the selected specification will be applied is determined from the
Pipe/Branch Reset options
Reset options list.
 Compone
Componentsnts Only - app
appli
lies
es the spe
speci
cifi
fica
cati
tion
on to the
the
selected components.
 Pipe
Pipe and Branche
Branches s - appli
applies
es the
the spec
specifi
ifica
cati
tion
on to the
the
co
compo
mpone
nent
nts
s sel
selec
ecte
ted,
d, the Pipe
Pipe an
andd al
alll of the
the own
owned
ed
Branches.
 Branch - appli
applies
es the
the speci
specific
ficat
atio
ion
n to the compo
compone
nent
nts
s
selected and all of the owning Branches.
 The latter two options
options will change the PSPEC attribute
attribute of the pipe and/or
and/or branch to that of the selected
selected
specification accordingly.


 Normal
Normally
ly any items which are not in the same spec as the current branch
branch are ignore
ignored
d by this process.
process.
This allows for items such as pipe supports and special components to remain untouched. However if
the Change
the Change out of spec components? checkbox
components? checkbox is checked, it forces the selection process to look at
all components, regardless of their original specification.
Clicking Apply button

button on th
the
e Select
Select Piping
Piping Spec form
form action
actions
s the sear
search
ch proc
process
ess to find equivalen
equivalentt
components in the selected specification. The component list is refreshed to show the new components. At
this point the form only contains a suggestion of what the new components will be and has not made any
chan
change
gess to the model
model.. Once
Once the sear
search
ch pr
proc
oces
esss has
has been
been compl
complet
eted
ed the
the list
list of compo
componenent
nts
s will
will be
highlighted to indicate the success or failure of the process.
 For the highlight colour

colour to be displa
displayed
yed the existing selection
selection must be deactivated
deactivated by clicking in the list.
A selection summary panel is displayed at the bottom of the form to show

the results of the specification selection process.
When a selection has been made the modification can be performed by

clicking the Apply button. Alternatively
Alternatively the Undo button can be used to
remove the selections that have been made so far.
7.1.
7.1.4
4 Erro
Errorr Me
Mess
ssag
ages
es
During the modification of the specification of the components if the

selection process encounters a problem; for example if no selection is
available for an element, an error message is displayed.
The list of components is highlighted to indicate the errors and ‘No selection available’ is displayed in the
New Spec Comp Componen
onentt column
column.. These
These er
error
ror mes
messa
sage
gess can
can be chec
checked
ked in more
more deta
detail
il via
via the Error
Messages tab.
Messages tab.

With the
With the Error Message
Messagess tab sel
select
ected,
ed, the form
lists the components selected for modification which
produce an error in the selection process. When the
selection process takes place, each selected item is
scanned to find an equivalent in the new
specifi
spe cificat
cation
ion.. Where an item
item can
cannot
not be foun
found,
d, an
error is indicated with a description in the error list,
as shown in the example.
7.1.5
7.1.5 High
Highli
ligh
ghti
ting
ng
The purpose of the Highlighting tab is to provide visual feedback regarding the success or failure of the
impen
imp endi
ding
ng chan
change
ges.
s. It can be seen
seen that
that compo
compone
nent
nts
s in the form
form arare
e hi
high
ghlig
light
hted
ed gr
green
een when
when a new
new
compone
comp onentnt has been
been success
successful
fully
ly selecte
selected.
d. Compone
Componentsnts are highli
highlight
ghted
ed in orange
orange if the
there
re is a failure
failure
selecting a new specification.
These
The se co
colo
lour
urs
s ar
are
e the
the syste
system m de
defau
fault
lt colo
colour
urs.
s. Th
Thes
esee
defau
default
lts
s ca
cann be chang
changed
ed by fro
from
m the
the Highlighting tab.
The form
form chan
change
gess to dis
displ
play
ay the defau
default
lt hi
high
ghli
ligh
ghti
ting
ng
colours.
These colours can be changed to the user’s preferences.

Alternatively, clicking the Off
Off radio button will remove the
highlighting for the selection.
The Res
Reset
et to Defaul
Defaultt button
button can be clicked
clicked to undo the change
changes
s to the highli
highlight
ghting
ing display settings
settings,,
returning them to the original
returning original default settings

7.
7.1.
1.6
6 Choo
Choosi
sing
ng a Co
Comp
mpon
onen
entt
For items where no selection is available, the Select

Component option from the right click menu can be
used to manually choose a component from any of
the specifications.
This displays the Choose

the Choose Option form
Option form as shown:
The Specs tab
The Specs tab is selected first to set the new
case A3B..
specification, in this case A3B
The Components tabtab is then

then sele
select
cted
ed so that
that an
equivalent item can be chosen from the form, in this
case
cas e STYP
STYP GLOB
GLOBE. E. Cli
Clicki
cking
ng OK adds the select
selected
ed
equivalent component to the components list tab on
the Modify
the Modify Components
Components form. Once the selection is
co
compl
mplet
ete
e clic
clickk the
the Apply b
bututto
ton
n on the
the Modify
Components form
Components form to perform the modification
modification..

7.1
7.1.7
.7 Modify
Modifying
ing Com
Compon
ponent
ent Bor
Bore
e
The nominal bore of the components can be changed
by selecting
click the Modify Bore
menu. the Modify Bore option
option from the right
The Select Bore form

The Select Bore form is displayed with an options list of available bore
si
size
zes.
s. The re
requi
quire
red
d bore
bore is sele
select
cted
ed from
from the
the list
list an
andd clic
clicki
king
ng OK
populates the component list with the new bore size. Once the selection
is complete click the Apply
the Apply button
button on the Modify
the Modify Components form
Components form to
perform the modification.
7.1.8 Modifying
Modifying Insula
Insulation
tion and Trac
Tracing
ing Spec
Specifica
ifications
tions
To show the Insulation
the Insulation and
and Tracing Specs the
Specs the Insulation
Insulation Spec
Spec and
and Tracing
Spec check
Spec check boxes need to be selected. In this case there is no Tracing on the
visible components so '-' is shown in the list.
To change the insulation

insulation or tracing
tracing specification
specification,, the appropriate
option is chosen from the right click menu.
A list of available specs is available for selection via the options list.
Apply adds
Clicking Apply
Clicking adds the selected spec to the component list.
Once the selection is complet

complete
e click the
the Apply
Apply button
button on the Modify
the Modify
Components form
Components form to perform the modification
modification..

7.
7.2
2 Modi
Modify
fying
ing a Sp
Spec
ecif
ific
icat
atio
ion
n – (W
(Wor
orke
ked
d Ex
Exam
ampl
ple)
e)
The current specification for pipe /100-B-8

pipe /100-B-8 is
is A3B this
A3B this will be changed to
to A1A in
A1A in this worked example. This
will
will chan
change
ge th
the
e ra
ratin
ting
g of th
the
e fi
fitti
tting
ngs
s from
from #300
#300 to #150
#150 with
with the
the ex
exce
cept ption
ion of the
the conne
connecti
ction
ons
s to the
the
equipment.
Add pipe /100-B-8 to the 3D View

View and
navi
navigat
gate
e .to the pipe le
Explorer leve
vell in the
the Model
Select Modify
Select > Spec/Bore > Pipe
Modify > Spec/Bore Pipe..
On the Modify
the Modify Components form
Components form select
the Select All option from the right click
menu.
The components will be highlighted and

labelled in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Select the Modify Specific

Select Specification
ation option
from the right click menu.

On th the
e Select
Select Piping
Piping Spec form select
select A1A and Pipes
Pipes an
and
d
Branches from
Branches from the
the Specification
Specification and Pipe
and Pipe Branch Reset options
list respectively. Click the Apply
the Apply button.
button.
The component list is updated, click in the form to view the highlighting.
The gaskets at the head and tail need to be changed to suit the
#300 connections
connections on the equipmen
equipment. t.
Select Gasket 1 from the compon

component
ents
s list
list and select
select Select
Component from
Component from the right click menu.
From the
From the CHOOSE OPTION form selectselect the Specs tab and
click the A1A
the A1A specificat
specification
ion from the list.

Select the Components tab and click gasket with the STYP
STYP of
of
GA which
GA which is the #300 version and click the OK button.
for Gasket 6 at the tail of the Branch1

Repeat these steps for Gasket
and Gasket
and 3 at the tail of the Branch2.
Gasket 3 at
Select Flange 3 from the components list and select Select

Component from the right click menu.
Component from
From the CHOOSE OPTION form select the flange with the
STYP of F and click the
STYP the OK button. This is the #150 version
to suit the Gate valve.
Repeat these steps for Flange

Flange 5 of
5 of the Branch1 and Flange
2 of the Branch2.

The summary shows that all of the components have been

specified
specified correctly.
correctly. Click the Apply button
button to comp
complet
lete
e the
modification.
Because some of the original list of components have been

deselected in order to view the highlighting a Question form
Question form
is di
displ
splay
ayed
ed.. Clic
Click
k the
the Yes b
butt
utton
on to conti
continu
nue
e with
with the
the
modification.

Exercise 7 - Modify Specification – Pipe /200-B-4
Change the specification of pipe /200-B-4

/200-B-4 from A3B
A3B to A1A using
A1A using the
Modify Components form.
Components form.
Use
Use th
the
e Select Component optio
optionn to ensu
ensure
re that
that the
the flan
flanges
ges and
and
gaskets at the head and tail are the #300 version to suit the equipment
connections.
CHAPTER 8
8 Piping
Piping Asse
Assembl
mblies
ies
Building pipes in AVEVA E3D is often a case of building single

compon
com ponent
ents s int
into
o a complex
complex arrange
arrangement
ment of branch
branches
es and
components. In the Plant industry there are sometimes fixed
conf
config
igura
urati
tion
ons
s of compo
compone
nent
nts
s wh
whic
ich
h can
can be reu
reuse
sedd man
manyy
times in a model and these form the basis of assemblies.
An assembly in AVEVA E3D is a series of components and

branches in a predefined configuration which may be copied
in
into
to th
the
e mo
mode
dell many
many time
times.
s. Alte
Altern
rnat
ativ
ivel
ely,
y, an as
asse
semb
mbly
ly
definition may be created to access existing macros or forms.
8.1 Usin
ing
g Assem
embl
blie
ies
s
Assemblies are accessed from the Piping

Piping Comp
Compone
onent
nt
Editor form
form in the same way as any other component type.
the Assembly button
Click the Assembly button from the
the Additional Components
tab to display a list of assembly types and subtypes.
The form opens showing a 3D

a 3D View of the currently selected
assemb
assembly
ly belongi
belonging
ng to the current
current Sub-Type
Sub-Type.. A SubSub-Typ
-Type
e
may contain numerous assemblies.
Alternative Sub-Types can be selected which allows access to

the Samples assembl
the members held within. In this case the Samples assembly y
area Sub-Type has been selected followed by the Flanged
tee assembly.
tee assembly. The 3D View is updated to show the selected
assembly.

When the selection of assembly has been made, it can be inserted into a straight tube or connected to a
component by clicking
component clicking the
the Insert
Insert button
button or Connect buttons
Connect buttons respectively.
If the assembly contains directional or multi bore components, additional details will be requested via the
CHOOSE and Input
CHOOSE and Input forms
forms during the building process.
 The behaviou
behaviourr of the
these
se form
forms
s is determined
determined during
during the creation
creation of the assembly
assembly.. Thi
This
s is cov
covere
ered
d in
detail in the TM-1868 AVEVA Everyt
Everything3D
hing3D (2.1) Pipe Modelling
Modelling Administration
Administration training guide.
Click the Insert
the Insert button
button and indicate the implied tube:
Select the offline bore size and direction for the tee.
Select the weld neck flange which has a connection that is compatible with the tee.

In this case a new branch has been created but the

br
bran
anch
ch head
head is le
left
ft for compl
complet
etio
ion
n la
late
ter.
r. It is al
also
so
possible for the assembly to be completed with the
ta
tail
il at the
the le
leav
avee of the
the fl
fla
ange.
nge. Thi
This happ
happen
enss
automatica
automatically
lly if the offlin
offline
e branch
branch of the ass
assemb
embly
ly
ha
has
s a conne
connect ctio
ion
n type
type of OPEN
OPEN,, CL
CLOS,
OS, VENT or
DRAN.
A similar result would be achieved using the

Connect button on the Piping Component Editor
form, but in this case, the tee would be connected to
the previous or next component.
By default, assembly origins are at the arrive point of the first component in the first branch of the assembly.
Certain assemblies need to be positioned using a different position, i.e. a simple assembly consisting of a
flange, gasket and flange may need to be positioned by the face of the first flange. The assembly origin point
is configurable using the Pipe Assembly Manager form.
form. If an origin has been defined, it will automatically
be used to position the assembly. If an assembly is connected to a component then the position is derived
by connecting the first component to the existing one.
As seen in the previous example, there are instances where some user interaction is required during the
creation of the assembly. The most common instances of this are:-
 Leave
Leave Bore of a Reduce
Reducerr – The arri
arrive
ve bore can be determine
determined d by the bore size
size at the inserti
insertion
on
point. However there are often numerous possibilities for the leave bore which requires some user
interaction.
 Offline
Offline Bore of a Tee – This is similar to the ab
above,
ove, the arriv
arrive
e bore can be determined
determined by the existing
existing
components but there are numerous possibilities for the offline bore of the tee.
 Orientation
Orientation of Directional
Directional Components
Components – These are components
components such as elbows,
elbows, tees and eccentric
eccentric
re
redu
duce
cers
rs whic
which
h al
alll requi
require
re some
some form
form of di
dire
rect
ctio
ional
nal in
inpu
putt in or
orde
derr to ori
orient
entat
ate
e the
the compo
compone
nent
nt
correctly.
Determining
Determi ning the Compon
of the component Component
ent Stype
the selection – When
must the from
be made system
thecannot automatically
automat
components inically determine
determine
the current the selection
selection
specification via
the CHOOSE
the CHOOSE form.
form.
The above issues can often be overcome with the use of rules during the creation of the assembly, but a
simple assembly
assembly with no rules would require some form of user interaction.
interaction.


CHAPTER 9
9 Splitt
Splitting
ing and Mer
Mergin
ging
g
It is often necessary to split pipes into more than one branch or pipe. This may be to make the isometric
drawing clearer or as a process requirement. Pipes can be split on an existing component, a plane or into
segments of a specified length. Pipe assemblies are inserted at the split points when using the plane or
segments length options.
Conversely the merging functionality can be used to merge pipes or branches into a single element. There
are obviously some restrictions in relation to the original structure of the pipes and branches that need to be
taken in to consideration.
consideration.
9.1 Pipe Splitting
A pipe may be split into segments within the same branch, new branch or new pipe. Multiple pipes may be
split on a single plane.
In the Tools
the Tools tab,
tab, click the Pipe
the Pipe Splitting button
Splitting button to display
the Split Pipe form.
The Split
The Split Pipe form
Pipe form has two tabs:-
 Split/Merge
Split/Merge –
– this is the main tab used to set up the
Split and
Split and Merge
Merge functions.
functions.
 Assembly – this is used to select the assembly that

will be inserted when splitting.

9.
9.1.
1.1
1 Split
Splitti
ting
ng Op
Opti
tion
ons
s
The upper section of the form determines how the split function will be performed. The appearance of the
form differs depending on the selection.
There are three radio button options for splitting:-
 Split Pipes on a Plane - Splits the pipe by inserting an

Plane -
assembly component at the intersection with a plane.
 Split
Split Pipes
Pipes in
into
to Segment
Segments s - Spl
Splits
its the
the pi
pipe
pe in
into
to
segments of a specific length. The splitting is defined
between two points that are indicated in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
 Split Pipes by Moving Compone

Component nt -
- Splits the pipe at
the selected component. The selected component and
all those downstream will then be added to a new pipe
or branch.
branch.
The radio buttons below the Move

the Move down-stream components to section
to section determine the resulting
configuration
configuration of the pipes and branches:-
branches:-
 Existing –Components
Existing –Components are inserted at the split position in the currently selected branch.
 New Pipe
Pipe - Comp
Compon
onen
ents
ts do
down
wnst
stre
ream
am of
of the
the s
spl
plit
it ar
are
e inse
insert
rted
ed int
into
o a n
new
ew pi
pipe
pe in
in the
the
hierarchy.
 New Bran
Bran - Compo
Componenent
nts
s dow
downs
nstr
trea
eam
m of
of the
the spli
splitt are
are inser
inserte
ted
d iint
nto
o a new br
bran
anch
ch owned
owned
by the current pipe.
9.1.2
9.1.2 Split
Split Pi
Pipe
pes
s on a Pl
Plan
ane
e
9.1.2.1
9.1.2.1 Bran
Branches
ches to Split
When using the Split

the Split Pipes on a Plane option the system
allows the collection a group of pipes using the Model
the Model
Explorer or
or 3D
3D View using
View using a variety of methods. These are
added to the Branches
the Branches to Split list.
Split list.
 Add CE
CE – adds the branc
anches related to the Current Element to
Element to the list.
 Add Selected
Selected - a numbe
numberr ofof pipe
pipes
s can
can be sele
select
cted
ed in
in the
the 3D View by dragging a crossing window
across the required pipes with the cursor. The selected pipes are then added to the
the Add Selected button.
list by clicking the Add Selected button.
 ID Selecti
Selection
on - this
this method
method is simi
similar
lar tto
o th
the
e above
above.. This
This li
list
st c
can
an b
be
e dynami
dynamical
cally
ly u
upda
pdated
ted by pickin
picking
g
any pipe component. To add to the list, click the ID Selection button the branches
can then be indicated in the 3D View. When the selection is complete, the Escape
the 3D View.
key is pressed to end selection.

Clear All
All - click this button to clear the Branches to Split list.
Split list.
 Thi
This
s section
section of the form does not need
need to be populate
populated
d if it is the intention
intention to use the ID
the ID Split function
function
later in the procedure.


In thi
this
s example
example,, the
the ID Select
Selected
ed button is clicked and the pipe is indicated in the 3D View.
View. Once the
the Escape button
selection is made the Escape button is used to end the selection process.
Individual pipes can be removed by from the Branches

the Branches to Split list
Split list
using the Remove
the Remove from list
list option
option from the right click menu.
9.1.2.2
9.1.2.2 Plane Def
Definition
inition
The main aim of this section of the form is to determine the

position and direction of the plane. This can be achieved by
entering the relevant position directly in to the textboxes
shown.
Alternatively, click the

the Define Plane link label to allow the
Define Plane link
selection of a position in the 3D
the 3D View in
View in conjunction with the
Positioning Control toolbar. case Graphics and
Control toolbar. In this case Graphics and
Cursor have
have been used.
The prompt ‘Pick

‘Pick A Position (Cursor) Snap:’
Snap:’
is displayed. In this case the edge of GENSEC
of GENSEC
3 belonging to FRMW
to FRMW /AXIS_P1.2 owned
/AXIS_P1.2 owned by
STRU PIPERACK has
PIPERACK has been indicated.

The plane can be seen in the 3D View and

View and the positions are transposed on to the form as shown.
By default the plane is shown solid and with the dimensions of 1000mmx1000mm. The appearance and
visibility of the plane can be changed by entering an alternative size and manipulating the Fill
Fill and on/off
checkboxes.
The position of the plane can be altered by entering alternative values to those shown or by using the Nudge
arrow buttons on the form to move pane relative to Plane

to Plane Direction.
Direction.
to 500mm,, the Fill
In this case the Plane size has been changed to 500mm the Fill checkbox
checkbox has been unchecked and plane
has been nudged 300mm
nudged 300mm in in the West
the West direction
direction so that the flanges are clear of the beam.

9.
9.1.
1.3
3 Split
Split Pi
Pipe
pes
s in
into
to Se
Segm
gmen
ents
ts
The Split Pipes into Segments option allows a single branch to be split into segments of a given length
between selected components or selected features that are adjacent to the pipe. This function does not
require the creation of a plane and is not capable of handling multiple branches.
The Spli
Splitt Pipe
Pipe Leng
Length
th se
section of the for form
dete
determ
rmiines
nes how
how le
leng
ngth
ths
s arare
e to be used
used by the the
functio
function.
n. Select
Select from the
the Segme
Segmentnt Length or
or Cut-
pipe Length options
Length options and key in the required value.
The Minimum Final Tube Length restricts

The Minimum Length restricts the length
of the final tube. If the final tube length is below this
value, the previous spools are adjusted to make the
final length within this value.
 The use of thi

this
s form is demonstrat
demonstrated
ed in wor
worked
ked
example later in this chapter.

9.
9.1.
1.4
4 Split
Split by Mo
Movi
ving
ng Co
Comp
mpon
onen
entt
The Split
The Split Pipe by Moving Component option
Component option allows a single branch to be split at an indicated component.
This function does not require the creation of a plane and is not capable of handling multiple branches. The
indicated component will be moved to a New Pipe
Pipe or
or New
New Branch,
Branch, consequently the Existing
the Existing radio
radio button
is not available.
Clicking the Split
the Split button
button will display a prompt, ‘Pick
‘ Pick
a Piping compone
component: nt:’’
Indicating a component in the 3D

the 3D View will
View will result in
the component and the downstream elements
being moved to a new pipe or branch.
In this example it is the valve at the tail of PIPE

of PIPE /100-B-8 that the New Pipe
/100-B-8 that has been indicated. With the New Pipe radio
radio
button selected the results can be seen by referring to the Model Explorer as as shown:-
 The new pipe or branch

branch will need
need to be renamed.

9.
9.1.
1.5
5 Ass
ssem
embl
bly
y Ta
Tab
b
The Assembly tab tab is onlnly

y re
rele
lev
vant
ant when
hen the
the
function
functio n require
requiress the addi
additio
tion
n of new comp
compone
onents
nts,,
i.e. the Split
the Split Pipes on a Plane and Split Pipes into
Segments options.
Segments options.
The resulting tab is very similar to the Assemblies

that are added via the Piping Component Editor
form. It allows the selection of the assembly that will
be inserted at the various split points.
Alternative assemblies can be selected by clicking

on the Filter
the Filter Assemblies
Assemblies By options
By options list.
The Assembly build origin options list determines

whether to build the assembly using the primary or
seconda
seco ndary
ry ori
origin
gin,, as def
define
ined
d during
during the assembl
assembly
y
creation.
The primary and secondary origin points allow some control over where the assembly is positioned relative
to the splitting point. One of the most common types of assembly is likely to be a set of break flanges where
the relevant points for positioning the assembly are on either flange face. In this case the primary origin point
would be defined as the leave point (upstream flange face) and the secondary origin would be defined as
being the arrive point (downstream flange face). A representation of the splitting procedure is as shown:
 Furt
Further
her inf
inform
ormati
ation
on on asse
assembl
mbly
y crea
creatio
tion
n is pro
provid
vided
ed in the TM-1867 - AVEV
AVEVA
A Eve
Everyth
rything
ing3D
3D (2.1
(2.1))
Project Model General Administration training guide.


9.
9.1.
1.6
6 Perf
Perfor
ormi
ming
ng th
the
e Sp
Split
lit
The Perform Commands

Commands section of the Split/Merge tab contains
contains the following
following context
context sensit
sensitive
ive buttons:-
 Split - th
this
is is avai
availa labl
ble
e fo
forr all
all th
thre
ree
e spli
splitt
ttin
ing
g optio
options
ns an
and
d us
used
ed to in
invo
voke
ke the
the spli
splitti
tting
ng
func
functi
tion
on onc
nce e al
alll th
the
e se
sett
ttin
ings
gs have
have bebeen
en made
made..
 ID Split
Split -
- this iis
s only available
available when
when using th
the
e Split Pipes on a Plane function and allows the
branches to be split to be indicated without populating the Branches to Split list.
Split list.
 Flow
Flow - this adds a flow direction arrow to the 3D View to
View to indicate which side of the
split represents the downstream components.
 Undo
Undo - used
used to undo
undo the previou
previous
s action
actions.
s.
 Dismiss -
Dismiss - closes the form.
9.1
9.1.7
.7 Splitt
Splitting
ing Pip
Pipes
es on a Pla
Plane
ne – (Wor
(Worked
ked Exa
Examp
mple)
le)
Add the PIPE
the PIPE /100-C-17 and
/100-C-17 and STRU
/EQUIP_SUPPORT to
/EQUIP_SUPPORT to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Click the Tools > Pipe Splitting button to display the Split
Pipe form.
Pipe form.
From the Assembly tab, select

From select Samples
Samples asse
assembly
mbly are
area
a
and FLAN
and FLAN GASK FLAN.
FLAN.
En
Ensu
sure
re th
the
e Assem
Assembly
bly build
build orig
origin s set to Buil
in iis Build
d to
Primary Origin.
Origin.

Navigate to an element owned by the branch in the Model

the Model
Explorer or 3D
or 3D View.
View .
From the
the Split/Merge tab
Split/Merge tab ensure the Split Pipes on a
the Split
Plane radio
Plane radio button is selected.
From the Move
the Move down-stream components to section
click ensure the New
the New Pipe
Pipe radio
radio button is selected.
Click Add
Click the Ad d Ce butto
button
n from
from the
the Detail
Detail Opti
Options
ons
section of the form.
The branch will be added to the Branches

the Branches to Split list.
Split list.
From the Plane
the Plane Definitions section
Definitions section click the Define
the Define
Plane link
Plane link label. Select Element
Select Element and
and Snap
Snap from
from the
Positioning Control toolbar.
Control toolbar.
Ind
Indicat
icate
e the
the pa
pane
nell at the top
top of the
the
support. The plane is added to the 3D
View and the positions are updated on
the Split
Pipe form.

In this case the pipes will be split by a flange and gasket arrangement 250mm above the panel.
Enter a value of 250mm in

250mm in the Nudge
the Nudge textbox
textbox and click the
right arrow button.
The plane will now be positioned above the panel as shown.
From
the the button.
the Move downstream components to section click
Split button.
the Split
Th
Thee intendnde
ed spl pliit posi
ositions are
in
indi
dica
cate
ted
d in thethe 3
3D D View
iew an
and a
Confirm form
Confirm form is displayed.
the Yes button.

Click the Yes
In th
this
is case
case the
the gasket
gasket type
type canno
cannott be det
deter
ermin
mined
ed and
and
requires a selection from the CHOOSE
the CHOOSE form. the OK
form. Click the
button on the Message
the Message form.
form.
the G stype and click the OK

Select the gasket with the G the OK button
button

The pipe wil

willl be split at the designat
designated
ed pos
positi
ition
on by the selected
selected assembly
assembly.. Thi
This
s is also reflect
reflected
ed by the
creation of a new pipe in the Model
9.1.8
9.1.8 Splitt
Splitting
ing int
into
o Seg
Segmen
ments
ts – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
Add PIPE /100

/100-C-
-C-13
13 to the 3D
View..
View
Open the
the Split Pipe form
Pipe form and from
the Assembly tab select Samples
assembly area and FLAN GAS GASK K
FLAN..
FLAN
Ensure the Assembly
the Assembly build origin
to Build to Primary Origin.
is set to Build Origin .
From the Split/Merge tab, ensure

From ensure
Split
the Split Pi
Pipe
pess in
into
to Se
Segm
gmenents
ts
radio button and the Split
the Split By option
By option
of Component Picks is selected.
Component Picks is
Select the Existing radio button in

the M ovove downstream
components
componen ts to section
to section of the form.
With the Split

Split Pipe
Pipe Length
Length option
set to Segment Length
Length,, the value
to 2000mm and Minimum
Minimum FinFinal
al
Length to 250mm click
Tube Length click the
Split
Split button.
button.
 The Spli
Splitt Pi
Pipe
pe Le
Leng
ngth
th is
define
defi ned
d as th the
e sp
spooooll le
leng
ngth
th
( Segme
S egment
nt Len
Length
gth ) or tube
length ( Cut-pipe
Cut-pipe Length )
Length ) so in
this case, it is the face to face
lengt
le ngth
h bet
betwe
weenen fl
flang
anges
es.. Th
The
e
tube length around bends and
tube length around bends and
elbo
elbows
ws is ca calc
lcul
ulat
ated
ed as th
the
e
centre line length.


The prompt, ‘Identify

‘Identify start of range selection to Select: is
Select: is
displayed.
Indicate FLAN
Indicate FLAN 1 of
1 of the branch as shown.
The prompt, ‘Identify

‘Identify end of range selection to Select: is
displayed.
Indicate ELBOW
Indicate ELBOW 5 of
5 of the branch as shown.
Once again the gasket type cannot be determined and

requires
requires a selection
selection from the CHOOSE
the CHOOSE form. the OK
form. Click the OK
button on the Message
the Message form.
form.
the G
Select the gasket with the G
stype and click the OK
the OK button.
 This will
will need to be repeated
repeated
for ev
for ever
ery
y ins
nsta
tanc
nce
e of th
the
e
gasket.

9.2 Merge Pip

ipe
e / Branch
The Merge branch / pipe function

The Merge pipe function provides the
following functionality:-
 Merge two adjacent branches
 Merge two adjacent pipes.
9.2.1
9.2.1 Merge
Merge Pip
Pipe
e – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
Add pipes /100-C-17 and /100-C-

17-Split(1) to
17-Split(1) to the 3D
the 3D View.
View . These
are the pipes that were the
subject of the Splitting Pipes on a
Plane worked example.
Open the Split
Pipe form.
the Merge branch / pipe radio

Click the Merge pipe radio button.
Fr
From
om ththe
e Merge
Merge Uni
Unitt sectio
section
n click
click the One
One Pi
Pipe
pe radio
button.
From the Perform
From Perform Commands
Commands sectio
section
n of the Split
Split Pipe
form click the Merge
the Merge button.
button.


The prompt, ‘Pick

‘Pick a Piping component – source
element: is
element: is displayed. This is the pipe that will be
merged. Select PIPE /100-C-
/100-C-17-Spli
17-Split(1)
t(1) from the
3D
3D View.
View.
The prompt, ‘Pick

‘Pick a Piping component – target
element: is displayed. This is the pipe that will own
element: is
the merged pipe. Select PIPE /100-C-17 from the
3D
3D View.
View.
A Confirm form is displayed box asking ‘Do you

Pipe?’ This is because
wish to delete the Source Pipe?’
the source pipe is now empty. Click the Yes
button.
The two pipes are now merged in to a single pipe

/100-C-17 (the
/100-C-17 (the target pipe).

Exercise 8 – Completing the Pipework
The following exercise

exercise will cover the completeion
completeion of the pipework
pipework below ZONE
below ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01.
Create Pipe
Create Pipe /250-B-5 below
/250-B-5 below ZONE
ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 using

Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
em = Process Branch B1 Head Details:-
Details:-
System B
 Connected to /E1301/N2
to /E1301/N2
Branch B1 Tail Details:-
Details:-
 Bore = 250mm
 Connection to /C1101/N2
to /C1101/N2
Branch B2 Head Details:-
Details:-
 Connected to /E1301/N3
to /E1301/N3

Details:-
 Connected to TEE1
to TEE1 of
of BRANCH
BRANCH B1
Suggestion:-
ELBO 2 of
2 of Branch B1 should be positioned using the Explicit Position form.
Position form.

Create Pipe
Create Pipe /80-B-14 using
/80-B-14 using the following information:-
 Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
Details:-
System B
 Connected to /D1201/N2
to /D1201/N2
Details:-
 Bore = 80mm
 Connect
Connect tail
tail to last
last member
member

Details:-
 Connected
Connected to TEE1 of
of BRANCH
B1

Details:-
 Connect
Connect tail
tail to last
last member
member
Suggestion:-
As before, the Explicit Position

Position form
form can be used
used to position
position the elbow
elbows
s to the explicit
explicit position
positions.
s. The
components from the elbow to the gate valve of Branch1 and the components of Branch 2 are positioned
fitting
fitting to fitting. Consequently the tail positi
positions
ons are determined
determined by the components’ overall dimensions.
dimensions.
The globe valve belonging to BRANCH

to BRANCH B2 is the HOLD specification.
B2 is selected from the HOLD specification.

 Dur
During
ing pre
prelim
limina
inary
ry rou
routin
ting
g a HOLD or Val
Valve/
ve/Inst
Instrum
rument
ent spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tion
n can be use
used
d to sele
select
ct inl
inline
ine
components not available in the current pipe specification. This allows the components which have
preliminary information to be included in the route. The HOLD
HOLD specification
specification is used during this training
course to demonstrate this functionality, see also PIPE
also PIPE /50-B-9.
/50-B-9.
The resulting isometric will indicate that the valve

is ‘on hold’.
 Fo
Forr addit
add itiion
onal
al in
info
form
rmat
atio
ion
n on crea
creati
ting
ng
isometrics refer to chapter 14.
The
fo use
forr the
th of nche
the
e branc
bra Connect
hess will setTo
will set Last
the
the conMember
conne
necti
ction button
button
on on the
the
Branch Tail tab of the Pipe Editor: Modify Pipe
fo
form
rm to be thethe same
same as thethe la
last
st me
membmber
er,, i.e.
i.e.
Flange RF ANSI 300lb in this case.
In this, or in any case where the connections need

to be different in order to satisfy the Connection
Compati
Com patibil
bility
ity Table
Table in Paragon;
Paragon; using the
Connect To First/Last Member buttons
buttons will result
in the pipe failing the Data
the Data Consistency check.
Consistency check.
This can either

This either be rectif
rectified
ied by settin
setting
g the value
manually or by using the Reconnect
the Reconnect button
button during
the creation of the connecting pipe as shown next.

Create Pipe
Create Pipe /80-A-11 using
/80-A-11 using the following information:-
 Prim
Primar
ary
y Syst
System
Details:-
System A
 Conn
Connec
ecte
ted
d to tail
tail of
of BRANCH
 Specification = A1A /80-B-14/B1
 Bore = 80mm Branch B1 Tail Details:-

Details:-
 Temperature = 50DegC  Connection

 Direction = W
 Position:-
Suggestions:-
 W 303000
Use Model Editor
Editor to determine the height of ELBO4 in
re
rela
lati
tion
on to the STRU /PIPERA
/PIPERACKCK belongi
belonging
ng to SITE
 N 309280
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01..
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01
 U 106000 (This
(This is an ararbi
bitra
trary
ry
va
valu
lue
e whi
hich
ch wil illl be upda
updateted
d
according
according to the route obtained).

Details:-
 Conn
Connec
ecte
ted
d to tail
tail of
of BRANCH
/80-B-14/B2

Details:-
 Connected
Connected to TEE1 of
of BRANCH
B1

After the connection of the branch heads to the

tails of PIPE
PIPE /80-B-14,
/80-B-14, the connection error
discussed previously can be corrected.
Selecting the Branch
the Branch Head tab
Head tab for BRAN
BRAN /80-A-
11/B1 will display a connection type error. Click
the Reconnect button.
the Reconnect button. The effect of this can be
best seen by referring to the Connection value
for BRAN
BRAN /80-B-14/B1.
/80-B-14/B1.
This will need to be repeated for the connection between BRAN /80-A-11/B2 and
/80-A-11/B2 and BRAN /80-B-14/B2 unless
/80-B-14/B2 unless
the error was corrected manually.

Complete Pipe
Complete Pipe /100-C-12 that
/100-C-12 that was left incomplete from Exercise 4 using the following information:-
Use the Editor

Editor to de
dete
termi
rmine
ne th
the
e corre
correct
ct heigh
heightt at th
the
e head
head of the
the bra
branc
nch
h in rel
relati
ation
on to the STRU
/PIPERACK belonging
/PIPERACK belonging to SITE
to SITE /SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01.
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01.

Create Pipe
Create Pipe /150-A-3 using
/150-A-3 using the following information:-
 Primary System = Process Branch1

Branch1 Head Details:-
Details:-
System A
 Conne
Connecte
cted
d to tail
tail of
of BRANCH
 Specification = A1A /100-B-2/B1
 Bore = 150mm Branch1 Tail Details:-

Details:-
 Temperature = 50DegC  Connection

 Direction = W
 Position:-
 W 303000
 N 308080
 U 106000 (This
(This is an arbitra
arbitrary
ry
valu
valuee whic
whichh wililll be up
upda
dateted
d
according to the route
obtained).
Branch2
Details:-
 Conne
Connecte
cted
d to tail
tail of
of BRANCH
/100-B-2/B2
Branch2 Tail Details:-

Details:-
 Connect
necte
ed to TEE1 of
BRANCH B1

Create Pipe
 Primary System = Process Branch1

Details:-
System B
 Connected
Connected to /P1502B/N2
to /P1502B/N2
Details:-
 Bore = 100mm
 Connected
Connected to /C1101/N6
to /C1101/N6
Branch2
Details:-
 Connected
Connected to /P1502A/N2
to /P1502A/N2

Details:-
 Connected
Connected to TEE1
to TEE1 of
of BRANCH
BRANCH
B1


Create Pipe
 Primary System = Process System B Branch1

Details:-
 Specification = A3B  Connected

Connected to /P1501A/N2
to /P1501A/N2
 Bore = 50mm Branch1 Tail Details:-

Details:-
 Te
Tem
mperarture = 50DegC  Connected
Connected to /C1101/N4
to /C1101/N4
Branch2
Details:-
 Connected
Connected to /P1501B/N2
to /P1501B/N2

Details:-
 Connected
Connected to TEE1
to TEE1 of
of BRANCH
BRANCH B1
Suggestions:-
All flanged valves need to be selected from the

HOLD specification.
HOLD specification.
The North positions are determined by the

connections to the equipment.
The control set in this pipe does not use the

assembly. The components will need to be created
the A3B and
using a combination of the A3B and HOLD
specifications.


Complete the route of Pipe

Pipe /40-B-10 that
/40-B-10 that was created earlier in this training guide.
Suggestions:-
Change the existing bends to screwed NPT elbows.
Connect the head and re-align the components to

suit the new position.
CHAPTER 10
10 Data Consistency
10.1
10.1 Data
Data Co
Cons
nsis
iste
tenc
ncy
y
10.1.1
10.1.1 Possible
Possible Ty
Types
pes of Data Error
The da
data
ta cons
consisiste
tency
ncy che
checki
cking
ng ut
util
ility
ity,, avai
availa
labl
ble
e with
within
in th
the
e Pipi
Piping
ng app
appli
lica
catio
tion,
n, chec
checks
ks the
the desi
design
gn for
for
occurrences of the following types of error.
Angular Alignment -
Alignment - Checks that components which are to be connected together are aligned in the same
direction:
Angular Alignm
Angular Alignmentent - Chec
Checks
ks that
that comp
compon
onen
ents
ts
which are to be connected together are aligned in
the same direction
direction
Axial Alignment
Alignment - Checks
Checks that
that compone
components
nts which
which
are
are to be conn
connec
ecteted
d toge
togeth
ther
er ar
are
e al
alig
igne
nedd on a
common axis.
Consistent Bores -
Consistent Bores - Checks that components which
are to be connected together have consistent bores.
Connection Types -
Types - Checks that components which
are
are to be conn
connec
ecte
ted
d toge
togeth
ther
er ha
have
ve comp
compat
atib
ible
le
connection types.
Minimum Tube Length - Checks that no length of

tube is less than a prescribed minimum (which may
depend on its bore).

10.1.2
10.1.2 Accessi
Accessing
ng the Data Cons
Consistenc
istency
y Check
Checks
s
In the Tools group

group cli
click
ck the
the Data Consiste
Consistency
ncy button to
show the Data
the Data Consistency
Consistency Check form
Check form as shown.
This for
This form
m is us
used
ed to ge
gene
nerat
ratee a di
diagn
agnos
ostic
tic report
report on the
the
data consistency of any part of the design.
The report can be listed on the screen (in the area in the
lower half of the form), or sent to a file from which a hard
Select Screen or
copy can be printed. Select Screen or File radio
File radio button and,
in th
the
e la
latte
tterr case
case,, spec
specify
ify the
the Directory and Filename.
Filename.
Then
The n choo
choosese the
the hi
hiera
erarc
rchi
hic
c le
leve
vell at whic
which h to chec
checkk the
the
design using the Check
the Check options
options list, the default value is CEis CE..
Fo
Forr pa
pararamet
meters
ers and
and toler
toleran
ance
ces,
s, the
the Da
Data
ta Consi
Consiste
stency
ncy
Check allows a margin of acceptable error before a problem
is reported. These built–in
built–in tolerances
tolerances have default
default values,
values,
but may be set to alternative values if preferred. Click the
Piping button from the
Piping the Parameters
Parameters section of the form will
display the Piping
the Piping Consis
Consistency
tency Check Options form.
Options form.
10.1.2.1 Design Tolerances

The mis
misal
alig
ignme
nment
nt betw
between
een adja
adjace
cent
nt compo
compone
nent
nts
s can be measu
measured
red usin
using
g any of the
the follow
followin
ing
g thre
three
e
parameters:-
 The displacement
displacement angle
angle between
between the p-arrive and
and p-leave axes.
axes.
 The offset distan

distance
ce between
between the p-arrive
p-arrive and p-leave
p-leave axes.
axes.
 The ratio of the offset

offset to the project
projected
ed dista
distance
nce between
between the p-arriv
p-arrive
e and p-leave
p-leave p-points
p-points
(equivalent to the tangent of the angle parameter).
The maximum permissible

values for any of these
parameters
parameters can be specified


10.1.2.2 Minimum Tube Lengths
Clickin
Clicking
g the Tub
Tube
e Ra
Range
nge butt
button
on fr
from
om thethe Data
Consis
Con sistenc
tency
y Check
Check Options
Options form
form wil
willl display
display the
Tube Tolerance Check Options
Options form.
form.
By defau
default
lt a report
report will
will warn
warn of alalll le
leng
ngthths
s of
tube
tube in the
the de
desi
sign
gn whi hich
ch ar
aree shor
shorteterr than
than
100m
100mm.m. Thi
Thiss al
allow
lowss a decis
decisio
ion
n to be made made
whet
wh ethe
herr ea
each
ch such
such leleng
ngth
th is adadeqequa
uatete for
for
weldin
weldingg procedu
procedures,
res, bolt
bolt wit
withdra
hdrawal
wal,, access
access,,
and so on. Th Thiis mi
min
nimu
mumm length can be
changed from the default of 100mm, and may
set different minima for up to ten different pipe
bore ranges if desired. i.e.:
 A mini
minimu
mumm le
leng
ngth
th of 15
150m
0mm
m for
for bo
bore
res
s
between 25 and 50.
 A mini
minimu
mumm le
leng
ngth
th of 30
300m
0mm
m for
for bo
bore
res
s
between 50 and 100.
In this case the Tube value is set to 50mm which will be used for all
sizes.
10.1.3
10.1.3 The Re
Repor
portt For
Format
mat
The report comprises a header, giving the date and time, followed by an itemised list of the elements being
checked, together with numbered diagnostic messages describing any potential problems.
An example showing errors:- If no problems exist the following message is

displayed.

10.1.4
10.1.4 Data Cons
Consisten
istency
cy Diagn
Diagnostic
ostic Mess
Messages
ages
With experience, the user will be able to identify which messages indicate errors which must be corrected,
and which are merely warnings of potential problems.
 A full list of the data consistency

consistency diagnostic messages,
messages, each identified
identified by a referen
reference
ce number can be
found in the Model Reference Manual of the AVEVA Everything3D Help.
As an example, a Pipe to Pipe connection, and some of the messages which might result will be considered.
The conn
connec
ecti
tion
on as show
shownn is a va
vali
lid
d one.
one. If any of th
the
e conn
connec
ecti
tion
on types
types we
were
re chan
change
ged,
d, the
the follow
followin
ing
g
messages may be witnessed:
A230 CONNECTION TYPE HCONN NOT SAME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION TYPE
The connection types FBD-FBD in this example must be the same.
B230 CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE TCONN NOT S
SAME
AME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE
The connection types GBD-GBD in this example must be the same.
D430
D430 BAD ARR
ARRIVE
IVE CON
CONNEC
NECTION
TION TYPE
The connection types GBD-FBD in this example must be listed as compatible in the COCO tables.
E730 LEAVE CONNECTI

CONNECTION
ON TYPE
TYPE (of the Flange)
Flange) NOT COMPATIB
COMPATIBLE
LE WITH TCONN
The connection types FBD-GBD in this example must be listed as compatible in the COCO tables.
10.1.
10.1.5
5 Example
Example of Diag
Diagnost
nostic
ic Mess
Messages
ages
The following examples explain the significance of some of the messages that the user might witness during
this training course:
10.1.5.1 Branch Head Errors
The following diagnostics apply only to the Head of a Branch:
A 10 HEAD REFERENCE NOT SET

The Head
OPEN, reference
VENT, CLOSshould only be unset (i.e. zero) if the Head Connection Type HCONN is set to
or DRAN.


A 20 HEAD REFERENCE POINTS TO NONEXISTENT ELEMENT
This error would result from the deletion of a component, such as a Nozzle, to which the Head of the
Branch was originally connected.
A 30 BAD HEAD RETURN REFERENCE
The Head is connected to an element that does not refer back to the Branch. This can occur when
th
the
e Head
Head of a Branc
Branch
h is conn
connec
ected
ted to an
anoth
other
er Branc
Branch,
h, imp
imply
lyin
ing
g that
that a Tee shou
should
ld be pl
plac
aced
ed
somewhere along the second Branch. The error can also occur when two or more branches are
inadvertently connected to the same terminal.
A200 DIRECTION HDIR NOT SAME AS TERMINAL DIRECTION
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the direction HDIR should
always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A210 POSITION HPOS NOT SAME AS TERMINAL POSITION
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the position HPOS should
always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A230 CONNECTION TYPE HCONN NOT SAME AS TERMINAL CONNECTION TYPE
If the Head is connected to a terminal, such as a Nozzle or Tee, then the connection type HCONN
should always be identical to that of the appropriate p–point of the terminal.
A300 REFERENCE HSTUBE UNSET
There is more than 1mm of tube between the Head and the p–arrive of the first Component (or the
Tail), but HSTUBE is unset.
A310 REFERENCE HSTUBE REFERS TO A NONEXISTENT SPCOM
This may occur if part of the Specification has been deleted.
A320 HSTUBE PROBLEM, CATREF IN SPCOM IS UNSET
This indicates an error in the Specification.
A330 HSTUBE PROBLEM, CATREF IN THE SPCOM REFERS TO NONEXISTENT Catalogue

COMPONENT
This may occur if part of the Catalogue has been deleted or if the CATREF is unset.
A400 HBORE NOT SAME AS BORE OF HSTUBE
The bore of any tube leading from the Head, determined from the Catalogue, should always be
identical to HBORE.
A410 HCON NOT COMPATIBLE WITH CONNECTION TYPE OF HSTUBE
The connection type of any tube leading from the Head, determined from the Catalogue, should be
compatible with HCONN.
A420 ISPEC REFERENCE POINTS TO NONEXISTENT ELEMENT
This error would occur if, i.e., the Insulation Specification pointed to by ISPEC had been deleted.

10.1.5.2 Branch Tail Errors
The same type of errors may occur to the Tail of a Branch. The message numbers are the same as for the
Head errors
errors but are preceded
preceded by a B. i.e.:
B 10 TAI
TAIL
L REFER
REFERENC
ENCE
E NO
NOT
T SET
The TailVENT,
OPEN, refereCLOS
reference
nce should
should only be unset
or DRAN. unset (i.
(i.e.
e. zero)
zero) if the Tail conn
connect
ection
ion type TCONN
TCONN is set to
10.1.5.3 Plain Branch Errors
The following diagnostics can occur only for Branches with no piping components:
C500
C500 TUBE TOO SHORT
SHORT B
BETWE
ETWEEN
EN HEAD
HEAD AND TAIL
The distance between the Head position, HPOS, and the Tail position, TPOS, is greater than zero
and less than the specified minimum tube length (default: 100mm).
C510
C510 BAD HEAD TO TAIL GEOMETR
GEOMETRY
Y
Either the Head position, HPOS, does not lie at a positive distance along the line through TPOS in
the directio
direction
n TDIR or the Tai
Taill positio
position,
n, TPOS,
TPOS, does
does not lie at a positiv
positive
e distan
distance
ce along
along the line
through HPOS in the direction HDIR.
The illustratio
illustration
n shows some typical examples:
examples:
C520
C520 HB
HBOR
ORE
E NOT
NOT SAME
SAME AS
AS TBOR
TBORE
E
When there are no components on the branch, the Head bore, HBORE, should be identical to the
Tail bore, TBORE.
C530
C530 HCO
HCONN
NN IS NOT
NOT COMP
COMPATIB
ATIBLE
LE WITH TCON
TCONN
N
This implies that the Head is connected directly to the Tail with no Tube or piping components in
between; hence the Head connection type, HCONN, must be compatible with the Tail connection
type, TCONN.
C540
C540 THIS BRANCH
BRANCH HAS NO COM
COMPON
PONENTS
ENTS
This does not necessarily indicate an error. It is output as a warning.
10.1.5.4 Component Specific Diagnostics
The fol
follo
lowi
wing
ng error
errors
s ap
apply
ply to in
indiv
divid
idual
ual pi
pipi
ping
ng co
compo
mpone
nent
nts
s an
and,
d, in som
some
e case
cases,
s, to thei
theirr ad
adja
jace
cent
nt
connections. Some of the errors also apply to Nozzles.
These are applicable to any component, regardless of its position in the network:
D100
D100 REF
REFERE
ERENCE
NCE SPREF
SPREF UNSET
UNSET
This probably means that the user has forgotten to choose the piping component correctly.


D300
D300 CON
CONN
N REFEREN
REFERENCE
CE NOT SET
Multi–way Components may be left unconnected only if the connection type of the relevant p–point
is OPEN, CLOS, VENT, DRAN or NULL.
D310 CONN REFEREN

REFERENCE
CE POINTS TO NON–EXISTENT
NON–EXISTENT BRANCH
BRANCH
This may occur if the Branch which is pointed to by the CONN reference has been deleted.
D320
D320 BAD CON
CONN
N RETURN
RETURN REF
REFEREN
ERENCE
CE
This may occur if the Branch which is pointed to by the CONN reference has been reconnected to
another terminal.
D400
D400 ARR
ARRIVE
IVE TUBE
TUBE LESS
LESS THAN
THAN TUBE
TUBE MINIMUM
MINIMUM.. ACTUAL
ACTUAL TUBE L
LENG
ENGTH
TH IS ...
...
The distance between the arrive p–point of this component and the leave p–point of the previous
component (or Head) is greater than zero and less than the specified minimum tube length (default:
100mm).
D410
D410 BA
BAD
D AR
ARRI
RIVE
VE GEOME
GEOMETRY
TRY
The position and direction of the arrive p–point of this component are not correct with respect to the
le
leav
ave
e p–po
p–poin
intt of th
the
e pr
prev
eviou
ious
s co
compo
mponenent
nt (or Head).
Head). The error
error coul
could
d be cause
caused d by in
inco
corre
rrect
ct
positioning
positioning of this component,
component, the previous
previous component (or Head) or both.
The illustration shows some typical examples:
D420
D420 BA
BAD
D AR
ARRI
RIVE
VE BORE
BORE
The bore of the arrive p–point of this component is not equal to the bore of the preceding tube or, if
this component is not preceded by tube, to the bore of the leave p–point of the previous component
(or HBORE).
D430
D430 BAD ARR
ARRIVE
IVE CON
CONNEC
NECTION
TION TYPE
The connection type of the arrive p–point of this component is not compatible with the preceding
tube or, if this component is not preceded by tube, to the connection type of the leave p–point of the
previous component (or HCONN).
D500
D500 REF
REFERE
ERENCE
NCE LSTUBE
LSTUBE UNSET
UNSET
The user has probably forgotten to select the piping Component.
D600
D600 LEAV
LEAVE
E BORE
BORE NOT
NOT SAME
SAME A
AS
S BORE
BORE OF
OF LSTUBE
LSTUBE
The bore of the leave p–point of this Component is not the same as the bore of the tube following
the Component.
D610 LEAVE CONNECTI
CONNECTION
ON TYPE
TYPE NOT COMPA
COMPATIBLE
TIBLE WITH CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE OF LSTUBE
LSTUBE
The connection type of the leave p–point of this Component is not compatible with the tube following
the component.


10.1.5.5 End Component Diagnostics
These are applicable only to the last component in a Branch:
E700 LEAVE
LEAVE TUBE
TUBE LESS THAN
THAN TUBE
TUBE MINIM
MINIMUM.
UM. ACTUA
ACTUAL
L TUBE LENGTH
LENGTH IS ...
...
The distance between the leave p–point of the current component and the tail position, TPOS, is
greater than zero and less than the specified minimum tube length (default: 100mm).
E7
E710
10 BA
BADD LEA
LEAVEVE GEO
GEOMET
METRYRY
The position and direction of the leave p–point of this component are not correct with respect to the
position,
position, TPOS, and direction, TDIR, of the tail. The error could be caused by incorrect positio
positioning
ning
of this component, the Tail, or both.
E720 LEAVE
LEAVE BORE
BORE NOT SAME AS TBOR
TBORE
E
The bore of the leave p–point of this component is not the same as the tail bore, TBORE.
E730 LEAVE
LEAVE CONNE
CONNECTIO
CTION
N TYPE
TYPE NOT COMP
COMPATIB
ATIBLE
LE WITH
WITH TCO
TCONN
NN
The connection type of the leave p–point of this component is not compatible with the tail connection
type TCONN.
D740
D740 ANG
ANGLE
LE OF C
COMPO
OMPONEN
NENT
T IS GREATER
GREATER THAN
THAN MAXIM
MAXIMUM
UM ANGLE
ANGLE
The Piping Specification has a range of angles for bends and elbows, the specified elbow falls out of
the angle range.
10.1.5.6 Pipe Route Diagnostics
D950
D950 ELEM
ELEMENT
ENT IS PART OF A BOTTOM
BOTTOM POCKET
POCKET
Indicates that a Drain may be required at the low point of the Branch.
D940
D940 ELEM
ELEMENT
ENT IS PART OF A TOP
TOP POCK
POCKET
ET
Indicates that a Vent may be required at the high point of the Branch.
10.1.5.7 Wall Thickness Diagnostics
D900
D900 INC
INCONS
ONSISTE
ISTENCY
NCY IN
IN SETTING
SETTING PIP
PIPE
E WALL THIC
THICKNE
KNESS
SS
Indicates that the Pipe Wall Thickness across adjacent components is not the same as specified in
the Pipe Specificatio
Specification
n W all Thickness Data Table.
10.1.5.8 Sloping Pipe Diagnostics
D920 ARRIVE SLOPE TOO

TOO SHALLOW,
SHALLOW, MI
MINIMU
NIMUM
M SLOPE 0.2722,
0.2722, ACTU
ACTUAL
AL SLOPE
SLOPE 0.
The slope has been set at Pipe Branch level and the pipe is not sloped.
D930 ARRIVE SLOPE TOO

TOO STEEP,
STEEP, MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM SLOPE
SLOPE 0.3008,
0.3008, ACTUAL SLOPE 1.1458
1.1458
The slope has been set at Pipe Branch level and the pipe is not sloped correctly.

Exercise 9 – Data Consistency
Perform the following tasks:-
 Use the Data
the Data Consistency
Consistency Check
Check form
form to check some of the pipes created in Exercise 8.
 Try to correct the errors

errors that are found
found
 The Trainer will help with the interpretatio

interpretation
n of the diagnos
diagnostic
tic messages.
messages.


CHAPTER 11
11 Pipe Penetration and Hole Management
On a typical AVEVA E3D project it is necessary for designers to create holes in panel elements, i.e. deck
pla
plates,
tes, gratin
process grating,
needsg,towalls,
wal
bels, floors,
floors, etc.
controlled etc. Due
and to the implic
managed. implicati
ations
ons on desi
design
gn int
integr
egrity
ity and cost,
cost, the hole creati
creation
on
The Piping Designer would not be able to create holes in floor plates or wall panels as these items would
have been created by another design discipline for example the Structural Department. These design items
would be held in another database for which the Piping Designer would only have read access.
A method of requesting, approving or rejecting a hole between disciplines is required; in AVEVA E3D this is
known as Hole Management.
The Piping Designer locates and sizes the hole and then makes a request for the hole to be created, usually
by the Structural
Structural designer.
 For the purposes

purposes of the traini
training
ng we will assume that we are both the Piping Designer
Designer and the Structural
Approver so that the full workflow can be discussed.
11.1
11.1 Introd
Introduc
uction
tion to Hol
Hole
e Ma
Manag
nagem
ement
ent
AVEVA E3D controls and manages holes using the Hole Management application which facilitates:
 Communicatio
Communication
n of hole data between disciplines
disciplines inc
including
luding the Request
Request and Approval processes.
processes.
 Ensuring
Ensuring holes are only created
created by users with
with appropriate
appropriate write access
access permissions.
permissions.
 Perform
Performing
ing vali
validati
dation
on checks on managed
managed holes
holes and providing
providing feedback
feedback to use
users
rs on the hole
status.
 Generation
Generation of reports
reports for managed
managed holes.
Generally in AVEVA E3D projects discipline Designers do not have write access to items created by other
disci
discipl
plin
ines
es.. Fo
Forr ex
examp
ample
le,, a Pipi
Piping
ng Desi
Design
gner
er does
does not
not ha
have
ve writ
write
e acce
access
ss to Struc
Structu
tural
ral el
eleme
ement
nts
s and
and
Structural Designers do not have write access to Piping elements.
With Hole
Hole Manage
Management
ment,, penetra
penetratio
tion
n holes
holes are specifi
specified
ed and request
requested
ed by the penetrat
penetrating
ing discipl
discipline
ine,,
normall
normallyy piping,
piping, HVAC,
HVAC, cable
cable or equipmen
equipmentt design
designers.
ers. They are approved
approved by the penetr
penetrated
ated discipl
discipline
ine,,
normall
normallyy str
struct
uctural
ural designers.
designers. For cases
cases whe
wherere a penetr
penetrati
ation
on is require
required
d for a steel
steel section
section through
through a
deck/floor
deck/floor plate, the hole would be specified,
specified, requested and approved
approved by the structural
structural discipline.
discipline.
The specification of a penetration hole by the relevant discipline in the appropriate Model application creates
a ‘virtual
virtual’’ hole in the panel element, consisting of a FRMW and two FIXING elements. Each fixing element
ha
hass a Speci
Specific
ficat
atio
ion
n Refe
Referen
rence
ce (Spre
(Spref)
f) at
attr
trib
ibut
ute
e that
that po
poin
ints
ts to the
the ho
hole
le de
defi
fini
nitio
tion
n in the catal
catalogu
ogue.
e. An
Association (ASSOC) element that references all of the hole elements is also created.
Once the ‘virtual

‘virtual’’ hole has been created, the penetrating discipline enters the Hole Management application
and requests the hole. The owner of the panel, normally the Structural discipline, then reviews and approves
(or rejects) the hole request using the mechanism provided by the Hole Management application.
The act of approving the request creates the ‘actual

‘actual’’ hole as a PFIT
a PFIT owned
owned by the PANE
the PANE element.
element. The Hole
Management application checks and validates the hole using the association restrictions and stores data on
the hole history and status. Only valid holes may be approved. For a structural penetration the Structural
Designer may be both the requester and approver, although specific company procedures, controlled by
DAC, may be required if the Originator and Reviewer need to be different.


11.1.1
11.1.1 Request
Request and Ap
Approv
proval
al Workf
Workflow
low
Once th
Once the
e pe
pene
netr
trati
ation
on hole
hole ha
has
s be
been
en sp
spec
ecif
ifie
ied
d and th
the
e ‘virtual
virtual’’ ho
hole
le cr
crea
eated
ted,, the Hole
Hole Manage
Managemen
mentt
application
appli cation provides a series of tasks for the Originator (Penetrating
(Penetrating discipline)
discipline) and Reviewer
Reviewer (Structural
discipline).
discipline). These tasks are:
Or
Orig
igina
inator
tor Tas
Tasks
ks Revie
Reviewer
wer Tas
Tasks
ks
Request Approve
Redundant Reject
Canc
Cancel
el Re
Requ
ques
estt Agre
Agree
e Redu
Redund
ndan
antt
Delete
Delete Entry
 There are three main workflow scenarios for the request/approval cycle that are detailed in Appendix D.
11.2
11.2 Introd
Introduc
uction
tion to Non
Non-Pe
-Penet
netrat
ration
ion Man
Manage
aged
d Ho
Holes
les
In addition to penetration
penetration holes, the Hole Management application
application enables creation of non-penetratio
non-penetration
n holes
in structural panels. These holes fall into two general categories:
 Holes that
that are required
required,, say, for access to a piece
piece of equipment,
equipment, a valve or other design
design item.
 Holes that
that are crea
created
ted by a panel fitting,
fitting, e.g.
e.g. a hatch,
hatch, door, window,
window, etc.
For non-penetration managed holes that are not created by a fitting, with the exception of a User Defined
hole type, the ‘virtual’ hole is created as a single FIXING in a new FRMW, as described for penetration
holes.
holes. This fix
fixing
ing has a Specifi
Specificat
cation
ion Reference
Reference (Spref) attribut
attribute
e that
that points
points to the hole definit
definition
ion in the
catalo
catalogue
gue.. An Associ
Associati
ation
on (ASSOC)
(ASSOC) eleelement
ment that referen
references
ces all of the hole
hole element
elements
s is also
also created
created..
Approving the hole creates a PFIT owned by the PANE.
User Defined hole shapes are created using a template and negative extrusion in a similar way as described
below for Fitting
Fitting holes.
For non-penetration holes that are created by a panel fitting, the ‘virtual’ hole is created as a single FIXING
in a new FRMW. The fixing owns a Template (TMPL) element that owns a negative extrusion (NXTR) whose
vertices describe the required hole shape. The fitting is created as a FIXING element owned by the PANE
whose Spref attribute points into the catalogue to the selected fitting. An Association (ASSOC) element that
referen
refe rences
ces all of the hole element
elements s is also
also create
created.
d. Approvi
Approving
ng the hole creates
creates an NXTR owneowned d by the
PANE that is a copy of the ‘virtual’ hole NXTR.
Non-penetration managed holes, of either type, may be associated with any other element in Model. The
holes have the same request/approval process as penetration holes; however, as they are created solely by
the structural discipline the Structural Designer may be both the requester and approver.
11.3
11.3 Use
Use of the Ho
Hole
le Man
Manag
ageme
ement
nt Ap
Applic
plicati
ation
on
The Hole Management application, as with other applications that use associations, is passive, i.e. the user
is not alerted
alerted if a hole
hole associa
associatio tion
n is broken or invali
invalidate
dated.
d. The user
user must enter the Hole Managemen
Managementt
application
application and actively verify if the associ
association
ation is still valid.
The use of the application will vary from company to company. In some it may be down to the individual
Desi
Designe
gners
rs to re
requ
ques
estt and appro
approve
ve ho
hole
les,
s, whil
whilst
st in ot
othe
hers
rs it may be the
the di
disc
scip
ipli
line
ne le
lead
ad Desi
Design
gner,
er, or a
designated user, who performs the tasks.


11.4
11.4 Creat
Creating
ing Sin
Single
gle Pen
Penet
etra
ration
tions
s
There are three ways that a pipe penetration can be selected:-
 Pipe Attachment
Attachment (ATTA) selected
selected from the current pip
piping
ing specification
specification,, this method will allow
allow the use of
a different attachment representation on the isometric.

Pipe
Pipe Coupli
Couplingng (COUP)
(COUP) selected
selected from the current
current piping specifi
specificat
cation
ion,, thi
this
s method
method is very useful
useful if
penetration material is needed on the piping isometric. Typical uses of this are penetration sleeves or
water tight bulkhead/deck flanges.
 Pipe
Pipe Attach
Attachment
ment (ATTA) selected
selected from a specia
speciall penetra
penetratio
tion
n specifi
specificati
cation,
on, this is ver
very
y use
useful
ful as the
current piping specification
specification does not need a special penetration
penetration attachment.
In the Penetrate
the Penetrate group,
group, select the Create
the Create Penetration option
Penetration option from the Pipe
the Pipe button
This opens the Create

the Create Penetration form
Penetration form as shown which
the Pick Penetrated Items
allows access to the Pick Items and
and Pick
Penetrating Items buttons.
Items buttons.
Clicking the Pick
the Pick Penetrated Items
Items button
button will allow the
selection of the element which requires the hole to be
added to it. In this case the panel belonging to FRMW
to FRMW
/EL(+) 107820_TOS owned
107820_TOS owned by STRU
by STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT.
/EQUIP_SUPPORT .
the Pick Penetrating Items

Clicking the Pick Items button
button will allow the
selection of the element which will be used as a reference
to create the hole. In this case BRAN
case BRAN /80-B-7/B1.
/80-B-7/B1.
The options at the bottom of the form then influence the

type of penetration created as shown in the following
sections.

11.
11.4.1
4.1 ATTA
ATTA Fro
From
m Pip
Pipe
e Spe
Spec
c
With the upper section of the form populated the Specification

the Specification
options list can be used to select the From
the From Pipe Spec option.
Spec option.
This will add the Marker Type options list to the form, select
ATTA.. Click the OK
ATTA the OK button
button to confirm the settings.
A specification
specification CHOOSE ATTA form will be displayed if there
is mor
more than one ATT TTA
A availa
ilable in the curcurrent pi
pip
pe
specification.
In this case select FLOR

select FLOR TRUE Penetration ATTA Unset from
the list and click the OK
the OK button.
If on
only
ly one ATT
ATTAA is pre
presen
sentt in the
the spec
specif
ific
icati
ation
on,, this
this will
will be
used as the default.
The Hole
The Hole Management – Definition form
Definition form is displayed.
The Single
The Single or Merged Penetration area
Penetration area at the top of the form
enables individual single holes or a merged hole to be specified
as a multipl
multiple
e penetrating
penetrating item by selectin
selecting
g the appropriate
appropriate radio
button.
mpleInconseq
example
exa this
con case
sequen there
uently
tly theisoption
only
opt sone
ions arepenetrating
disabl
disabled. item
ed. Thi
This in lthis
s wil
will be
detailed later with the use of the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form.
Utility form.
The sections of the form that are available for use are:-
 Hole Type
 Penetrating Item Clearance
 Hole Shape Parameters

Parameters
 Positioning
 Information
The Hole Type section

The Hole Type section of the form contains a Class
a Class options
options list
that enables the selection of the class of hole, i.e. Standard
Types,, Piping penetration piece tables and Pipe Duct
Types Duct..
Types,, Piping penetration piece tables
Types tables and
and Pipe
Pipe Duct
Duct..


The cont
conten
entt of the
the Type options
options list
list chan
changes
ges
depending on the Class
Class selected.
selected. The examples
shown are the types that are available when the
Class is
Class the Standard Types option.
is set to the Standard Types option.
The Penetrating
Penetrating item clearance
clearance sectio
section
n of the
form contains the Clearance
the Clearance textbox
textbox that enables
a clea
clearan
rance
ce aro
aroun
undd the
the penet
penetrat
rating
ing item
item to be
specified.
The Hole shape parameters section of the form

The Hole
display
dis plays
s differe
different
nt paramete
parameterr textbo
textboxes
xes for the
di
diffe
ffere
rent
nt ho
hole
le type
types.
s. In this
this case for a Circular
case for
Hole – Type D the
D the only parameter is Diameter
is Diameter .
The Diameter
Diameter value
value is default
defaulted
ed to the Outsid
Outside
e
Diamete
Diameterr of the selec
selected
ted pip
pipe,
e, i.e.
i.e. 89mm
89mm (88.9
(88.9
OD).
In the
the ca
case
se the
the Diameter
Diameter value
value has increa
increased
sed
from 89 to 139 i.e. the pipe OD + 2 x Clearance.
The ‘virtual’ hole clearance fixing is displayed at

the specified clearance
clearance diameter in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
The Diameter textbox
Diameter textbox can be altered directly by
ke
key
yin
ingg in a valu
value,
e, in this
this ca
case
se 200mm. This
increases the diameter of the ‘virtual’ hole such
that it is greater than the specified clearance.
Th
The
spece ified
specifi ‘virt
vi
edrtua
ual’
dil’
diameho
hol
ameteler (this
ter fixi
fixin
(th isngis ithe
s edi
th disp
spla
ou
outelay
terryed that
of the the
the
e tw
twoo
fixing extrusions shown).
The Set to Minimum button

The Set Minimum button resets the hole shape parameters to the minimum value(s) required to create a
valid hole, taking into account the Clearance
the Clearance value.
value. In this case clicking the button would set the Diameter
back to 139mm.
 The number
number and descriptio
description
n of para
paramete
meters
rs in the Hole shap
shape
e par
parame
ameter
ters
s are
area
a of the form vari
varies
es
depending on the Hole type selected.
The Positioning area
The Positioning area of the form enables an offset in the X and Y directions for the penetration hole to be
specif
specified
ied by enterin
entering
g appropr
appropriat
iate
e values
values in the X Offse
Offsett and Y Of
Offse
fsett textbo
textboxes
xes.. This
This ena
enable
bles
s the
penetrating item to be eccentric to the penetration hole, which may be required in some circumstances.
The Rotation
The Rotation gadget
gadget enables the hole shape be rotated to align the hole in a different direction. This is only
relevant on non-circular shapes. The rotation value may be set by using the up or down arrow or by entering
a value in the textbox.
The Information
The Information section
section allows a purpose to be set for the hole


Clicking the OK
the OK button on the Hole
the Hole Management – Definition form
Definition form creates the FRMW
the FRMW and
and two ‘virtual’ hole
FIXING elements, one for the clearance diameter and one for the penetration hole, in the STRU whose
Purpose attribute is set to HOLE. In this case it is STRU
is STRU VH-Stru in
VH-Stru in the SITE
the SITE HM-Virtual-Holes.
HM-Virtual-Holes.
The top level fixing is auto-numbered using the format HM-VH-

format HM-VH-nnnn
nnnn,, where nnnn
where nnnn is
is a four digit sequential
number starting at 0001. The secondary level fixing is auto-numbered using the format HM-VH-
format HM-VH-nnnn
nnnn-SUB-
-SUB-
nn
nn,, where HM-VH-
where HM-VH-nnnn
at 01. nnnn is
is the name of the top level fixing and nn
nn is
is a two digit sequential number starting
The association is created in the ASSOGP whose Purpose attribute is set to HOLE and is automatically
named using the format HM-ASSOC-
format HM-ASSOC-nnnn nnnn,, where nnnn
where nnnn is
is a four digit sequential number starting at 0001.
A penetration ATTA will be

b e created in the pipe branch. This is shown as a grating on the piping isometric.
A fixing has been created in the database ready for creating the
hole using the Hole
the Hole Association Manager form
form later in the
process.

11.
11.4.2
4.2 Couplin
Coupling
g from
from Pip
Pipe
e Spe
Spec
c
The same process

process is rep
repeat
eateded as above,
above, this
this
time with the Marker
the Marker Type
Type of COUP as
COUP as shown.
The
The /SP//SP/DRDR0707C
C has
has exexa ampl
mples of typi typica
call
pen
penetra
etrati
tio
on slee
sleeve
ves
s and
and is used used here
here to
illustrate this alternative method.
The CHOO
CHOOSE SE CO
COUP UP form
form is di disp
spla
lay
yed
ed,,
sh
show
owining
g the the av
avai
aila
labl
ble
e coup
coupli
ling
ngss frfrom
om the the
specif
spe cifica
icatio
tion.n. Select
Select the comp
componeonent
nt wit
with
h the
Stype of
of MACB2OR andand then
then clic
click
k the
the OK
button.
 Thi
This
s co
comp
mpon
onen
entt ca
can
n ca
cate
terr fo
forr an
angl
gled
ed
connec
conn ecti
tion
ons
s an
andd al
allo
low
w th
the
e fi
fitt
ttin
ing
g to be
flip
flipped
ped to eieithe
therr si
side
de of ththe
e pen
penetetrat
rated
ed
item.
The penetration flange has been placed on the underside of the panel. From the Positioning section of the Hole
Management
Manageme nt - Definition
Definition form
form click the Flip
the Flip Side button
Side button to reposition the penetration flange as shown.
The diameter of the coupling is fixed by the catalogue and does not affect
the diameter of the hole to be cut in the steel. In this case the flange
diameter is 200mm so a suitable value of 220mm may
220mm may be entered in the
Diameter text
text box.
The pe
pene
netr
trati
ation
on flang
flange
e is show
shown n on the reresu
sult
ltin
ing
g
isometric sketch, indicating the side of the panel that
the component is to be placed.

An alternative to this would be use of one of the penetration sleeve options. Once again the Diameter
the Diameter would
would
need to be altered to suit the outside diameter of the sleeve used.
11.4.3
11.4.3 Pipe Penet
Penetratio
ration
n Example
Examples
s (Standa
(Standard
rd Types)
Types)
Circu
Circula
larr Ho
Hole
le - T
Typ
ype
eD Sy
Symme
mmetri
trica
call (O
(Ova
val)
l) Hole
Hole - Asymmetrical Hole – Type Rectangular Hole –
Type HO HOR Type HR
Triangular
Triangular Hole – Ty
Type
pe HT
HT Rectangular
Rectangular Hole (w/ears
(w/ears)) Circular Hole – Type D Circular Hole – Type
– Type HRM with Kicker Plate D with Sleeve
Rectangular Hole – Type Rectangular Hole – Type
Rectangular
HR with Kicker Plate HR with Sleeve


11
11.5
.5 The
The Ho
Hole
le Ma
Mana
nage
geme
ment
nt Ut
Util
ility
ity
In the Penetrate
group, select the Penetration
the Penetration Utility
Utility option
option from the Pipe
the Pipe
The Managed Hole Utility form

The Managed Utility form is divided into four
sections:-
 Create Holes,
Holes,
 Merge Holes
Holes,,
 Modify Holes
Holes,,
 Utilities.
Utilities.
 It will be noticed
noticed that there is some overlap between
between the
previously discussed Create
Create Penetration form
Penetration form and the
Managed Hole Utility form.
form.
11.5.1
11.5.1 Creat
Create
e Hol
Holes
es Sec
Sectio
tion
n
The Create Holes section
The Create Holes section of the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form allows the creation of holes one by one using
the Create
the Hole function; or to create all the holes for a SITE
Create Hole function; SITE,, ZONE
ZONE,, or PANE using
PANE using the Auto Penetrate
CE button.
CE button. Before either of these options is selected it may be necessary to set the clearance.
Clearance – Th
This
is is the
the clea
cleara
ranc
nce
e that
that wi
will
ll be ap
appl
plie
ied
d
around the tube element of the branch.
Auto penetrate CE –

CE – This can be used from any hierarchy
posi
positi
tio
on and
and the
the appl
appliica
cati
tion
on wiwill
ll find
find al
alll clas
clashe
hes
s of
HVAC
HVAC/Pi/Pipe
pe with
with PANE
PANE el eleme
ementnts
s to in
indi
dica
cate
te wher
wheree new
new
penetrations are required.
Create Hole – This allows the selections of the penetrated

item followed by the penetrating item to create the hole. This
provides
provides greater control to the user.
provides
provides greater control to the user.


11.5.1.1 Clearance
The Clearance textbox allows a value to be entered for the clearance. This value is added to the outside
diameterr of tube.
diamete
Clearance with Tube Only:
Clearance set to 0mm

to 0mm,, the outside diameter of the tube is used for the hole in the
steel.
Clearance with Reducer:
to 0mm,, the largest diameter of reducer is used for the hole in the
steel.
Clearance with Flange:

to 0mm,, the outside diameter of the tube is ignored and the flange
diameter with an allowance is used instead.
 Th
Thiis re
requ
quir
ires
es th
the
e us
use
e of th
the
e AH
AHDI
DI re
refe
fere
renc
nce
e in th
the
e Da
Data
ta Se
Sett of th
the
e
component in
in Paragon.
Paragon. This is not set for all flanges delivered by AVEVA.
The example
example shoshown
wn use
usess a wel
weld
d nec
neckk fla
flange
nge from the SP/DR07C
SP/DR07C spec
spec,,
(Catref /DBFWBP0LL).

11.5.1.2 Auto Penetrate CE
Navi
Naviga
gati
ting
ng to any any hi
hier
erar
arch
chy
y po
posi
siti
tion
on us
usin
ing
g the
the Model
Explorer in this
Explorer this ca
case
se /PA
/PANE 1 owne
owned d by SBFR
SBFR /EL(+)
/EL(+)
107820_TOS_PLATE has
107820_TOS_PLATE has been used.
the Auto Penetrate CE

Clicking the Auto CE button
button the application will find
all clashes of Pipe with Panel (PANE) elements to determine
where
here new
new pene
penetr
tratatiions
ons are re
requ
quiire
red.
d. In this
this ca
case
se a
Clearance value
Clearance value of 20mm has
20mm has been entered.
Once th
Once the
e an
analy
alysi
sis
s is compl
complet
ete,
e, the
the pi
pipe
pes
s an
andd assoc
associaiate
ted
d
vi
virt
rtua
uall ho
hole
les
s ar
are
e adde
added d to the
the 3D View
View and
and the
the Hole
Association Manager form form is displayed.
 In some cases, i.e. if a STRU is selected, the analysis

can ta
can take
ke lo
long
nger
er.. A pr
prog
ogre
ress
ss ba
barr is us
used
ed to tr
trac
ack
k th
the
e
completion rate.
The Hole
The Hole Association Manager form
form is also displayed with the details of the newly created virtual holes.
 The Hole
Hole Ass
Associa
ociation
tion Man
Manager
ager
form wi
form will
ll no
nott be di
disp
spla
laye
yed
d if no
virtual holes are created.
 If mo
more
re tha
than
n 30 vi
virt
rtual
ual holes
holes ha
have
ve
been created a confirmation
mess
ssaage to displ
pla
ay the Hole
Association Manager
Manager form will be
displayed.
 The use of this form will be covered

in section 11.7.5 Hole
Management .

11.5.1.3 Create Hole
The Create Hole function

The Create Hole function allows the creation of holes one at a time using a similar method to that shown for
the Create
the Create Penetration form
Penetration form shown previously.
Clicking
Clicking the Create
elements.the Create Hole button
Hole button will allow the selection of the
The
The promp
rompt, t, ‘Pick
Pick Pane
Panell to
Penetrate:’
Penetrate :’ is display
displayed.
ed.
Upon indication of the panel a

second prompt, ‘Pick
Pene
nettra
ratting Ite
tem:
m:’’ is
displayed.
The virtual hole is added to the 3D

the 3D View.
View.

11.
11.5.2
5.2 Merge
Merge Hol
Holes
es
The Merge Holes section

The Merge Holes section of the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form
Utility form allows two or more exiting hole to be merged
into one virtual hole.
Pick Holes – This allows the selection of the penetrations

which are to be merged.
Merge
Merge Ho Hole
les
s – Thi
This merg
mergeses the
the pr
prev
eviiousl
ously
y pi
pick
cke
ed
penetra
penetratio
tions
ns int
into
o one virtua
virtuall hol
hole.
e. By defa
default
ult this butt
button
on is
unavailable
unavailable until the Pick
the Pick Holes button
Holes button has been used.
From the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form the Pick Holes button.
Utility form click the Pick Holes button. The prompt, ‘Pick
‘ Pick Penetration to Merge:’
Merge:’
is displayed
The penetrations which are to be merged

into one virtual hole are selected in the 3D
View..
View
 A minimum of two penetrations must

be picked to allow the holes to be merged.
Once the penetrations have been selected, click the Merge

the Merge Holes
Holes button
button to complete the creation. The
merged penetrations will be added to the 3D
the 3D View.
View .

11.
11.5.3
5.3 Modify
Modify Ho
Holes
les
The Modify Holes section

section of the Managed
Managed Hole
Hole Utility
Utility fo
form
rm all
allows
ows the modifi
modificati
cation
on of the hole, the
management of the hole association and the deletion of penetrations.
Modify
Modi fy CE – Th Thiis di
disp
spllays
ays the
the Hole
Hole Mana
Manage
geme
ment
nt -
Definition form
Definition form as shown previously.
Manag
Manage
e Ho Hole
les
s – Thi
This didisp
spla
lay
ys the
the Hole Associ
Associatio
ation
n
Manager form
form allowing the selected holes to be managed.
 This will be detailed later

later in this chapter,
chapter, separately
separately from
the other two options, see section 11.7.5.
Delete Hole
Delete Hole – – This allows the selection of a penetration to be
deleted. This will also remove all of the hole associations.
11.5.3.1 Modify CE
Using the 3D
the 3D View,
View, the penetration to be modified is selected and the Modify CE button
CE button is clicked to display
the Hole
the Hole Management – Definition form.
Definition form.
Th
Thee form
form ca
can
n alalso
so be open
opened ed by
selecting
select ing the Modify
Modify Ho Hole
le option
from the Holes button options list in
the Penetrate
the Penetrate group.
group.
The form is displayed and the selected penetration in the 3D

View is
View is highlighted and the positioning axis is displayed.
The Hole
Hole Ma
Mana
nage
geme
mentnt – De Defi
fini
niti
tion
on for
form ha
has
s been
discussed previously, refer to section 11.4.1.

11.5.3.2 Delete Hole
Clicking the
Clicking the Delete
Delete Holes button
Holes button form the Managed
Utility form allows the selection of a penetration
to be deleted.
The prompt, ‘Pick

‘Pick penetration to delete:’
delete:’ is displayed.
Using the 3D View

Using View the pen
penet
etrat
ratio
ion
n to be delete
deletedd ca
can
n be in
indi
dicat
cated
ed.. The respo
respons
nse
e to this
this fun
funct
ctio
ion
n is
dependent upon the current status of the penetration:-
 If the hole
hole has no status,
status, i.e. itit has not been
been processed
processed by the Hole
the Hole Association Manager form
form it
will be deleted.
 If the
the hole
hole statu
status
s is ‘Requested
Requested’,
’, a Confirm message
will be displayed.
 If tthe
he hole status
status is ‘Approved
‘Approved’,
’, an Error
an Error message
message will
be displayed indicating that the deletion is not permitted
11.5.4
11.5.4 Util
Utilit
itie
ies
s
The Utilities
The Utilities section
section of the Managed
Utility form facilitates the following:-
 The add
additi
ition
on to
to the
the 3D View of structu
structural
ral panels
panels wi
withi
thin
n the volume
volume of the selecte
selected
d Pip
Pipe/HV
e/HVAC
AC
element,
 The add
additi
ition
on to the
the 3D Vie
View
w of th
the
e Pi
Pipe/
pe/HV
HVAC
AC el
eleme
ement
nts
s with
within
in the
the volu
volume
me of the
the sele
select
cted
ed
structural panel
 The produc
production
tion of a hole
hole report.
Add
Add StrStruc
uctur
turee – Thi
This allows
ows the indidic
cation of the
penetra
penetratin
ting
g ite
item
m to add the penetra
penetrated
ted struct
structure
ure to the
the 3D
View..
View
Pipe/HVAC –
Add Pipe/HVAC – This allows the indication of the structural
panel to add all Pipes/HVAC penetrating the structure to the
3D View.
View.
Hole Report – This allows the production of a hole report.

The Report Headings for Hole, Penetrated, and Penetrating
can be selected from the Managed Hole Reports form.


11.5.4.1 Add Structure
To see the effect of this function remove all PANE

PANE elements
elements from the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
From the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form,
Utility form, click the Add
the Add Structure
Structure button.
button.
The prompt ‘Pick
prompt ‘Pick penetrating item’ is
is displayed.
In this example PIPE
example PIPE /100-C-16 is
/100-C-16 is indicated in the 3D View.
View . The penetrated PTRU
penetrated PTRU elements
elements are added to
the 3D View.
the 3D View .
11.5.4.2 Add Pipe/HVAC
To see the effect of this function remove all pipes from the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
From the Managed
the Managed Hole Utility form, the Add Pipe/HVAC button.
Utility form, click the Add Pipe/HVAC button.
The prompt to ‘Pick

to ‘Pick Panel’ is
is displayed
In th
this
is case
case PANE 1 belonging
belonging to SBFR EL(+)107820_TOS_
EL(+)107820_TOS_PLATE
PLATE is ind
indica
icated
ted in the 3D View
View. The
penetrating pipes are added to the 3D View.

11.5.4.3 Hole Report
From the Managed Hole Utility form, click the Hole

Report button
Report button to display the Managed Hole Reports
form.
The form can also be opened by

the Hole Report option
selecting the Hole Report option
from
from thethe Holes button
button option
options
s
list in the Penetrate
the Penetrate group.
group.
The for
form
m is di
divi
vided
ded ininto
to two
two mai
main
n secti
section
ons,
s, Hole
Association Filter and Report
and Report Headings.
Headings.
11.5.4.3.1 Hole Association

Association Filter
This section
section of the form all
allows
ows the specifi
specificat
cation
ion of the required
required filter
filters
s to dete
determine
rmine which
which holes
holes will
will be
included in the report. The upper part of this section contains three checkboxes.
Current Element – This displays any holes

asso
associ
ciat
ated
ed with
ith the
the curr
curren
entl
tly
y sele
select
cted
ed
element only.
Graphical
Graphical Selectio
Selectionn – This applies filtering
to al
alll mana
manage gedd ho
holles asso
associ
ciat
ated
ed with ith
elements
elemen ts in the current graphical selection.
selection.
All Managed Holes – This applies filtering

to all managed holes in the MDB
Discipline – This specifies holes for all disciplines or for a single discipline using the
Discipline –
options list.
Status – This specifies holes at any status or specifies holes at a given status using
Status –
the options list.
Valid –
Valid – This specifies holes in relation to their validity or all holes regardless of validity
using the options list.


The Display
The Display section
section of the form has a single checkbox:-
 Invalid
Invalid – This includes the hole associations that have any bad references, invalid references or
invalid data.
The Display option is not relevant if the Current Element radio button is being used. The option will be
greyed out.
11.5.4.3.2Report Headings
The Report Headings section

The Report Headings section of the Managed
the Managed Hole Reports form,
Reports form, allows the selection of the headings that
are required on the report from the three categories:-
 Hole information
 Penetrated item information
 Penetrating items information
The
re
repo specific
port
rt can
can beheadings
se
sele
lect
cted to be
ed byincluded
chec
checki in the
king
ng the
the
indivi
individua
duall check
check box
boxes.
es. In additio
addition
n to thi
this
s
ther
there
e arare
e the
the Select
Select All Hea Heading
dingss and
Clea
Clearr He Head
ading
ingss li
l ink labels to aid
population of the form.
Once the required headings have been specified the Run Report
Report button can be used to create the report.
The Managed
The Managed Hole Reports form
Reports form appears, containing an Export
an Export to Excel
Excel and
and Print Preview link
Preview link label.

A right click menu is also available which will allow

the following tasks to be performed:-
 Navigate
Navigate To
To > Association
Association//Penetrated
Penetrated Item
Item//
Penetra
Penetrating
ting Item

Add to 3D view
 Remove from 3D view
 Focus on Hole
 Export list to Excel
 Print list
list..
11.6
11.6 Creat
Creating
ing Non
Non-Pe
-Penet
netrat
ration
ion Man
Manage
aged
d Hole
Holes
s – Fr
Free
ee Hol
Holes
es
Occasi
Occa sion
onal
ally
ly the pi
pipe
pe desig
designe
nerr may requi
require
re a hole
hole th
throu
rough
gh a stru
struct
ctura
urall panel
panel that
that is no
nott for a pi
pipe
pe
penetration. This is known as a non-penetration managed hole. The requested hole will then be controlled
using the Hole Association Manager form.
Free Holes are standard hole shapes, some of which include sleeves or kicker plates. In addition to these is
a User Defined shape. This option is also available in other Model disciplines, i.e. HVAC, STRUCTURES
etc.
11.6
11.6.1
.1 Free
Free Ho
Hole
les
s
In the Penetrate
group, selecting the General
the General Hole
option from the Holes
the Holes button
button options list displays the
Create Hole from.
Hole from.
The upper
upper secti
section
on of the
the form
form list
lists
s the
the Penetrated
Object..
Object
Clicking the Pick Penetrated Element or Floor Floor link

la
labe
bell re
resu
sult
lt in the
the pr prom
ompt
pt ‘Pi
‘Pic
ck a face on the
penetrated object’
object’ being displayed. This allows the
selection
selec tion of the PANE
the PANE element
element in the 3D
the 3D View.
View .

The Hole
Hole Ty
Type
pe optio
options
ns list
list sho
shows
ws the avai
availab
lable
le
holes. The first six entries are the same hole types
available for penetration holes. The remaining hole
types are various shapes with additional
components, i.e. kicker plates or sleeves.
The last entry is User

is User Defined
Defined which
which enables a user
de
defi
fine
ned
d shape
shape for
for the ho
hole
le to be spec
specif
ifie
ied,
d, this
this is
covered in one of the following sections.
Once the Penetrated
the Penetrated Object and the Hole Type has been determined clicking the OK button will display
the Hole
the Hole Management – Free Hole Definition form.
Definition form.
The example shows the form with the Rectangular

Hole – Type HR with Kicker Plate selected.
Plate selected.
The select
selected
ed Hole
Hole Type
Type is didisp
splay
layed
ed in the 3D
View,, on the penetrated item. Default sizes are used
View
with graphical aids that indicate the Hole X and Hole
Y directions and the default X
default X and Y offsets from the
Panel origin.
The default hole location is the pick position from the penetration item selection. This default position may be
subsequently changed using the X
the X Offset and
Offset and Y
Y Offset textboxes.
Offset textboxes.
The form has two tabs:
 Hole Definition –
Definition – to define the shape, size, position and rotation of the hole.
 Associated
Associated Elements –
Elements – to define the element(s) the hole is to be associated with, e.g. items of
equipment, valve handles etc.

11.6.1.1 Hole Definition Tab
From the Hole Definition

Definition tab, the follow
following
ing details
and parameters can be changed, to suit the required
hole.
The Hole
The Hole Type may
Type may be changed from that specified
on ththe
e Create
Create Hole
Hole form
form by simp
simply ly se
sele
lect
ctin
ing
g a
different type from the list. The graphical
representation of the Hole Type will change to the
new type.
The Hole Sha

Shape pe Paramete
Parametersrs secti
section
on of the
the form
form
changes depending on the hole type selected, with
the rel
releva
evant
nt para
paramete
meters
rs shown
shown for thatthat hole type.
Fo
Forr ex
examp
amplele,, for a Rectan
Rectangula
gularr Hol
Hole e – Type HR
with
wit h Ki
Kick
cker
er PlaPlate
te has pa
para
rame
meteters
rs for
for the
the hole
hole
Width and Height,
Height, Radius,
Radius, and Kicke
Kickerr Pl
Plate
ate
Height and
Height and Thickness
Thickness..
The Hole Position and Orientation section of the

form enables the X
the X Offset and
Offset and Y Offset,
Offset, i.e. X and Y
distances from the panel origin, to be set. The values
defa
defauult to the
the pi pick
cke
ed posit
ositio
ion
n and
and refl
reflec
ectt the
the
displayed
displa yed values on the graphical aids.
The X Offset
Offset and Y
and Y Offset values may be changed
manu
ma nual
ally
ly by enente
teri
ring
ng the
the rerequ
quir
ired
ed va
valu
lue
e in the
the
appropriate textbox.
Alternatively, clicking the Align in X or

or Align in Y link labels displays the prompt ‘ Align
Align Hole to picked
position’’ and activates the Positioning Control
position Control toolbar. Any position, using any of the positioning control
options can be indicated to align the hole with in the specified direction. The X Offset or
Offset or Y
Y Offset values
Offset values are
changed
change d automatically
automatically to reflect the picked position.
Cl
Clic
icki
king
ng th
the
e bu
butt
tton
on di
disp
spla
lays
ys th
the
e pr
prom
ompt
pt ‘Pick a face on the penetrated object ’. ’ . A new hole position
may be picked on the panel using the cursor. The X
The X Offset and
Offset and Y
Y Offset values
Offset values are updated accordingly.
The Rotation
The Rotation textbox
textbox enables the rotation around the Z axis of the hole to be specified either by entering a
value in the textbox or using the up or down arrows to change the angle in 5° increments.

11.6.1.2 User Defined Hole Type
Selecting the User
the User Defined
Defined option
option from the
Hole Type options
Type options list allows the creation of
shap
shapes
es other
other than
than the
the standa
standardrd opti
options
ons
available.
This displays the Loop

the Loop Vertex Editor form.
form.
A default hole, an NXTR with four vertices,

wi
with
th di
dime
mensnsio
ions
ns of 20
200m
0mmx
mx20
200m
0mm
m is
added to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
The hole shape may be defined by adding,

deleting or modifying vertices to the NXTR
loop in the same way as editing a panel or
normal negative extrusion.
 For more information

information on the use of the
Loop Ve
Loo Vert
rte
ex Ed
Ediito
torr fo
form
rm,, refe
referr to
traini
nin
ng guide TM-1
TM -18
812 AVEVAVEVA
Everything3D (2.1) Structural
Modelling.

11.6.1.3 Associated Elements Tab
On the
the Associated
Associated Elements ta tabb the element
elements s
associated with the hole are shown in the the Current
Association
Assoc iation Elements
Elements list.
list. Initia
Initially
lly these include
the panel and hole reference.
Clicking the Pick
the Pick Association Elements link label
display
dis playss the pro
prompt
mpt ‘Pick associated item’.
item’. Any
item(s) may be picked to associate the hole with.
The select
selection
ion pro
proces
cess
s is ter
termina
minated
ted by prepressi
ssing
ng
the Esc
the Esc key.
key. The selected item(s) will also appear
in the
the Current Association Elements list.
Elements list.
Sele
Selectctin
ing
g an as asso
soci
ciate
ated
d item
item fro
from
m the
the list
list and
and
the Remove Association option
selecting the Remove Association option from the
ri
righ
ghtt click
click men
menu u re
remov
moveses it from
from the
the list
list an
andd al
alll
references
referen ces to it from the associati
association.
on.
The Primary
The Primary Panel and
Panel and Hole Reference items
Reference items are required
to create the hole and attempting to remove them displays a
Message form
Message form as shown.
Having specified all of the requirements for the hole, clicking the Apply button
Apply button on the Hole
the Hole Management –
Free Hole Definition
Definition form
form will create the ‘virtual’ hole.
The hole must be requested and approved using the Hole Association
Association Manager
Manager form, covered in the
following section.

11
11.7
.7 Hole
Hole Ma
Mana
nage
geme
ment
nt
In order to inform the structural department that a hole is required the hole needs to be requested using the
Hole Association
Association Manager
M anager form.
form. This
This for
form
m is open
opened
ed by clic
clicki
king the Manage Holes button
ng the button on Hole
Management Utility form, or in the Penetrate group, selecting the Hole Manager option
Manager option from the Holes
11.7.1
11.7.1 Hole As
Associa
sociation
tion Filte
Filters
rs
This section allows the filtering of the Managed Holes to be displayed on the Hole
the Hole Association Manager
form.
Current
Current Element
Element – This displays any holes
asso
associ
ciat
ated
ed with
ith the
the cucurr
rren
entl
tly
y se
sele
lect
cted
ed
element only.
List
List of El
Elem
emen
ents
ts – Th
This
is acti
activa
vate
tes
s the
the
Element
Elements
s to Manage
Manage secti
section
on of the
the form.
form.
This will be detailed later in this section
Holes –
All Managed Holes – This applies filtering to
all managed holes in the MDB


Discipline – This specifies holes for all disciplines or for a single discipline using
Discipline –
the options list.
Status – This specifies holes at any status or specifies holes at a single status
using the options list.
Claimed –
Claimed – This specifies holes in relation to their claimed state using the options
list.
Valid – This specifies holes in relation to their validity or all holes regardless of
Valid
validity
validity using the options list.
The Display
The Display section
section of the form has a single checkbox:-
 Invalid
Invalid – This includes the hole associations that have any bad references, invalid references or
invalid data.
The Display option is not relevant if the Current Element radio button is being used. The option will be
greyed out.
Apply Filter link
The Apply
The link label refreshes
refreshes the form according to the elemen
elementt and filteri
filtering
ng options selected.
For instance, navigate to a PANEL element in the Model Explorer and select the Current Element radio
button. From the Discipline
the Discipline options
options list select Piping
select Piping and
and click the Apply Filter link
link label. This will result in
only pipe elements
elements that penetrate the single structural
structural panel being displayed.
the List of Elements radio button will activate the Elements to Manage section of
Alternatively selecting the
the form. This allows a more specific approach regarding which structural panels to filter on.

Elements can be added to the list by navigating to them in

the Model
the Model Explorer and the Add Current Element
and clicking the Add
link label.
Clicking the Refresh link label will update the contents of
the Hole Associations list.
the Hole Associations list.
Elements
Element s can be removed
removed by using the rig
right
ht click
click menu
and selecting Remove
selecting Remove element.
element.
the Reset link
Alternatively clicking the Reset link label will populate the list with the CE
the CE only.
11
11.7
.7.2
.2 Show
Show Ta
Tags
gs
The Show
The Show Tags checkbox
Tags checkbox is an aid to identify the selected hole association in the 3D
the 3D View.
View.

11.7.
11.7.3
3 Transluce
Translucent
nt Pene
Penetrate
trated
d
The Translucent Penetrated checkbox

Penetrated checkbox is also an aid to make the
penetrated item translucent in the 3D View.
View. Using the default 3D
View settings
View settings this will have very little impact because the panels are
already translucent. However the effect can be seen below on a
panel which has had the default translucency changed.
11.7.4
11.7.4 Hole As
Associa
sociation
tion Optio
Options
ns
The Hole Associations list has several options available from the right
click menu:-
 Navi
Naviga
gate
te To – this
this opti
option
on has
has a su sub-
b-me
menu
nu co
conntai
taini
ning
ng
Association,, Pene
Association Penetrat
trated
ed Ite
Item
m and Pene
Penetrat
trating
ing Ite
Item
m. ThiThis
allows the navigation to these elements in the Model Explorer .
 Validate –
Validate – this checks the validity of the selected association.
 Add to 3D View
View – – this adds the virtual hole, penetrated item and
penetrating item to the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
 Remo
Removeve fr
from
om 3D View
View – this
this re
remo
move
ves
s the
the virt
virtua
uall ho
hole
le,,
penetrated
penetrated item and penetrating
penetrating item from the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
 Focus
Focus on Hole
Hole – this centres the 3D View and zooms to the
selected association.
 Modify
Modify Definitio
Definitionn – this
this open
opens s the
the Hole
Hole Manag
Manageme
ement
nt –
Definition form
Definition form to allow the hole to be modified if required.
 Save/Unclaim
Save/Unclaim – – this allows the user to perform a Save Work and
releas
releases
es databas
database e claims
claims on the selecte
selectedd hole
hole data allowing
allowing
other users to modify the same hole data immediately
 Export
Export to Excel…
Excel… - this
this al
allow
lows
s the Hole
Hole As
Asso
soci
ciati
ation
ons
s to be
saved to Excel.
 Pri
Print
nt Preview
Preview – thi
his
s op
ope
ens a Prin
intt Preview of the Hole
Associations.


11.7.
11.7.5
5 Managing
Managing Hole As
Associa
sociations
tions
The following is the procedure for handling

handling Hole Associations.
Associations.
Before the request and approval procedure can be started the

validity of the association must be checked, i.e. that the pipe
has not been moved etc.
From
From the Hole Associa
Association
tions
s lis
list,
t, select
select the item
item requir
required
ed and
select Validate..
from the right click menu select Validate
Th
The
e re
resu
sult
lt of the
the va
vali
lida
dati
tion
on wil
illl be di
disp
spla
laye
yed
d in the
the Ho
Hole
le
Associations list.
From the Hole Association Manager

Manager form click the Manage
Selected Holes link
Holes link label.
The Hole Management form

The Hole Management form is now displayed. The top of the form shows the List of Holes detailing
Holes detailing similar
information to the previous Hole
previous Hole Associations list..
Associations list..
There are also three tabs:-
 Hole validation
results
 Selected
Selected hole data
 Hole History
Th
Ther
ere
e is al
also
so a text
text bo
box
x
that allows a Hole
Comment to be added with
an acacco
compa
mpany
nyin
ing
g Save
button.
The bottom
bottom sectio
section
n of the
form has two headings:-
 Originator Tasks
 Reviewer
Reviewer Tasks
Tasks of Request
In this case the pipe designer is the creator of the hole and initially only the Originator Tasks
and Delete
and Delete Entry are
Entry are available for use. The options that are available are dependent upon the current status
of the hole.


Click the Request
the Request link
link label. A Confirm
A Confirm form
form appears asking ‘Do
‘ Do you really want to change the status to
REQUESTED? ’ click the Yes
the Yes button.
The history of the hole can now be seen in the Hole History tab
History tab of the form.
Now
No w tha
thatt the hole
hole has
has bee
been
n reque
request
sted
ed by the
the pi
pipin
ping
g
designer the only Originator Tasks that are available
are Cancel
are Cancel Request
Request and
and Delete
Delete Entry
Entry..
The Revie
Reviewer
wer Tasks would
would on
only
ly be avai
availa
labl
ble
e to the
the
discipline that owns the Panel, who at this stage would
ha
have
ve th e Approve or
the or Reject functio
functions
ns availa
available
ble to
them.
Clicking the Return
the Return to Hole Associations link
Associations link label will
sh
show
ow how
how thethe StStat
atus
us ha
has
s be
been
en adde
addedd to the
the Hole
Associations list
Associations list as shown.
The request process has claimed the hole association which will prevent any further modification by the
reviewing
reviewing discipline.
discipline. To overco
overcome a Save/Unclaim option
me this a Save/Unclaim option is available from the right click menu.
 Thi
This
s is the same function
functionali
ality
ty as the standard
standard Savework
Savework and
and Unclaim functionality used throughout
AVEVA E3D. It has been added to the right click options to improve the workflow for this procedure.

The approval of the hole by the reviewing discipline will result in the Status
Status and
and Valid
Valid columns
columns being update
in the Hole
the Hole Associations list
Associations list and the hole being added to the panel.

Exercise 10 – Hole Creation
 Navigate
Navigate to FRMW /EL(+)1
/EL(+)107820_
07820_TOS
TOS owned by STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT belonging to SITE
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 and
/SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 and add it to the 3D
the 3D View.
View .
 Use the
the Add
Add Pipe/HVAC button on the Managed Hole Utility form to add the pipes to the 3D
View..
View
 Use the Copy
the Copy Element With Offset function
Offset function to copy PIPE
copy PIPE /80-B-7 250mm
/80-B-7 250mm in the Y
the Y direction.
The 3D
The 3D View should
View should look as shown.
 Use the
the Create Penetration form for
for PIPE /100-C-17 to create a penetration From Pipe Spec
using an ATTA
an ATTA.. Use the Circular
the Circular Hole – Type D D type
type with a clearance of 75mm.
 Use
Use the
the Create Penetrat
Penetrationion form
form fo
for
r PIPE /100-C-
/100-C-16
16 to cr
crea
eate
te a pepene
netr
trat
atio
ionn frfro
om the
the
Penetrations specifica
specification.
tion. Use the Ci
Circu
rcula larr Ho
Hole
le – Typ
Typee D wit
with
h Ki
Kick
cker
er Pla
Plate
te type
type with
with a
75mm.
clearance of 75mm.
 Use the
the Managed Hole Utility form to set a clearance value of 50mm and with Panel element
selected use the Auto
the Auto Penetrate CE
CE button.
button.
 Use the
Utility form to merge the holes for PIPE
PIPE /80-B-7 and the copy. Use the
Modify CE button to create a Rectangular Hole – Type HR with a a Width
Width of 450mm,
450mm, Height
Height of
200mm
200mm and
and Radius
Radius of
of 100mm
100mm..
The 3D
The 3D View should
View should look as shown.
 Use Hole
Use Hole Association Manager form
form to Validate
to Validate and
and Approve the
Approve the holes.


.
CHAPTER 12
12 Clash Detection
This chapter provides an overview of the clash detection functionality that is available within AVEVA E3D.
The functionality is covered in detail on another training course but the use of the form is such an integral
part of the pipe modeling workflow in AVEVA E3D that it has to be mentioned in this guide as well.
 Fo
Forr a fu
full
ll des
descr
crip
ipti
tion
on of th
the
e AVE
AVEVA
VA E3D Cl
Clas
ash
h De
Dete
tect
ctio
ion
n fun
functi
ction
onali
ality
ty re
refer
fer to TM-
TM-180
1802
2 AVE
AVEVA
VA
Everything3D (2.1) Model Utilities training guide.
12.1
12.1 Acc
cces
essi
sing
ng th
the
e Cl
Clas
ashe
hes
s Fo
Form
rm
In the Check group

group of the
the Home tab,
tab, cli
click
ck the
the Clashes button
button to
display the Clashes
the Clashes form.
form.
 Th
This
is will
will ope
open
n a ta
tabb
bbed
ed form over the top of the 3D Vie
View
w . It
maybe necessary to use the Clear
the Clear Canvas button
Canvas button to improve the
visibility. When it is opened it displays the information that was
displayed previously. In this case the form has not been used in
the current session of AVEVA E3D so it is empty.
12.2
12.2 Exec
Execut
uting
ing a Cl
Clas
ash
h Ch
Chec
eck
k
Navigate to PIPE
to PIPE /100-B-8 and
/100-B-8 and from the Clashes
the Clashes form
form click the Check
the Check CE link
CE link label.
Alternatively, if the form is not open navigate to the element to be checked and
in th
the
e Check
Check grouroup,
p, select
select the Check
Check CE option
option fro
from
m the Clashes button
options list.
Click the Clear Canvas button.
the Clear Canvas button.


The form displays a list of the Clashes

Clashes on
on the relevant tab and the graphical representation of the currently
selected clash in a 3D
a 3D View.
View . Selecting the clashes in the list will update the 3D View accordingly.
View accordingly. By default
the colour for the Clash
the Clash Item is
Item is bright red and the Obstruction
the Obstruction is is tomato. These values can be changed via
the Options
the Options tab
tab if necessary.
It can be seen from the clashes that are being reported that this pipe needs to be modified to overcome the
obstructions.

Exercise 11 – Clash Detection
 Clash
Clash check as many of the pipes created
created in Exercise
Exercise 8 as possibl
possible
e in the time permitt
permitted.
ed. It
maybe necessary to add element
element :WALKWAY /AREA01-WALKWAYS to
/AREA01-WALKWAYS to the the Exclusions list
Exclusions list
on the
the Obstructions/Exclusions tab of the Clashes form. This is achieved by selecting the
Explorer and clicking the Add button
element in the Model Explorer button when the option
options s lis
listt is set to
Element.
Current Element.
 Make any modificatio

modifications
ns that are required
required to overcome the
the clashes.
clashes.

This page is intentionally left blank

CHAPTER 13
13 Design Checker
13.1
13.1 Valid
Validat
ation
ion Ph
Philo
iloso
soph
phy
y
AVEVA E3D piping promotes the philosophy of

chec
check k and
and mod
modifific
icat
atio
ion
n be
befor
fore
e the
the Produ
Producti
ction
on
Information is created and distributed. This can be
easily illustrated by a simple flow diagram showing
ho
howw the
the prproc
oces
ess
s of DesiDesign
gn Ch
Chececk,
k, Inte
Integr
grat
ator
or
Check, Clash Check and Modify may be repeated
until all aspects have been satisfied
satisfied..
13.2
13.2 Desi
Design
gn Ch
Chec
ecke
ker
r
The Design Checker utility

utility allows design consistency checks, written as macros, to be added quickly and
easily to Model
to Model.. Some simple design checks are supplied by AVEVA as part of the installation. These will be
expanded upon over time.
The Design
The Design Checker utility
utility provides:
 A standard customisa
customisable
ble user interface
interface for model
model consistency
consistency checks.
checks.
 Standard
Standard reportin
reporting,
g, to screen and file,
file, of the results of a model consiste
consistency
ncy check
check..
 The ability
ability to add new checking
checking functions
functions tailored
tailored to the working
working practices
practices employed
employed by the
company or project.
 Navigation
Navigation to the elements
elements that have
have failed the checks
checks directly
directly from the form.
Additional checks required by the user can be added to the standard consistency checks provided by
AVEVA. A check is a macro function which tests selected elements in the database, and reports back to the
Checker Results form
Results form whether the element has passed or failed the tests.
From the Check
the Check group
group of the HOME
the HOME tab, the Checker button
tab, click the Checker button
to access the Checker
the Checker form.
form.


The Checker
The Checker form
form will appear as shown.
 All checking
checking operations
operations are contro
controlled
lled from the Checker
the Checker form.
form.
 When the Checker
the Checker form
form is initially displayed, the Check
the Check Items list
Items list will be empty.
13.2.1
13.2.1 Desig
Design
n Che
Check
cker
er For
Form
m
The Check
The Check Items list
Items list of the Checker
the Checker form
form allows the specification of which elements are to be checked.
The Checks
The Checks pane
pane allows the selection of one or more check functions to be applied to those elements.
To add elements to the Check

the Check Items list,
Items list, click Add
click Add and
and select an option from the drop-down menu.
Current Element Adds the current element selected

selected
in the Model
Current
Current Element Members Ad
Adds
ds all
all membe
members rs of
of the
curre
current
nt el
eleme
ement
nt,, but
but not
the current element itself.
Graphical Pick Allows

Allows element
elements
s to be picked from
the 3D
the 3D View.
View.
Current Collection Adds all the elements

elements in the
Collection.
Failed List Adds all element

elementss which have failed an
earlier check, as listed on the Checker
the Checker
Results form.
Results form.


To remove items from the Check

Items list, click Remove
click Remove and
 Remov
Remove
e only becomes active
active when the Check
Items list is populated.
All Remove
Removes s everything
everything from the Check
the Check
Items list
Items list and removes all highlighting.
highlighting.
Selected Removes
Removes selected
selected elements
elements from the
Check Items list.
Items list.
Current Element Removes the current element

highlighted in the Model
the Model Explorer
from the Check
the Check Items list.
Items list.
Current Element Members Removes

Removes all the members
of the current element
from the Check
Items list,
but not the current
element
Graphical Pick Remove

Removes s elements
elements from the
Check Items list by picking them
in the 3D View
View. Any high
highli
lighti
ghting
ng
on the element is also removed.
Current Collection Remo

Removes
ves all the ele
element
ments
s iin
n the
the
Collection from the Check Items
list.
To make it easier to interpret the check results, the elements can be highlighted in the 3D View.
View.
To highlight items in the 3D

the 3D View,
View , click Highlight
click Highlight and
 Highl
Highlight
ight only becomes
becomes active when
when the Check
Items list is populated.
Elements… Highl Highlights

ights all el
elements
ements that a are
re in the
the Check
Items list
list.. When the
the selec
selecte
ted,d, the
the
Elements Colour for
form is di disp
splalaye
yed
d
which allows the selection of the
highlight colour.
 Only elements
elements already in the Drawlist
Drawlist will be highli
highlighted;
ghted;
elemen
elem ents
ts ar
are
e no
nott add
added
ed to th
the
e 3D Vie
View
w automatically.
Rem
Re mov
ovin
ingg el
elem
emen
entsts fr
from
om ththe
e lilist
st wil
illl re
remo
move
ve ththe
e
highlighting from the selected element

Passed Pass
Passed
ed is an On/O
On/Off
ff to
togg
ggle
le.. When
When on
on,, sh
show
ownn by a tick
tick on the
the me
menu
nu,, al
alll
elements
elements which
which pass subsequent checks will be highlighted.
highlighted.
Failed Failed is an On/Off toggle.

toggle. When on, shown by a tick on the menu, all elements
elements
which fail subsequent checks will be highlighted.
Colours > Passed Displa

Displays
ys the Passed Colour
Colour form,
form, wh
when
en Passed
Passed is activa
activated
ted on the menu,
allowing the selection of a highlight colour for elements that pass the check.
Colours > Failed Display

Displays
s the Failed
Failed Colour
Colour form,
form, when
when Faile
Failed
d is ac
acti
tiva
vated
ted on the menu,
menu,
allowing the selection of a highlight colour for elements that fail the check.
Clear > Selecti
Selection
on
Allows the selected element to be cleared.
Clear > All
Allows all elements to be cleared.
13.2.1.1 Check Functions
The available check functions are organised into Disciplines

Disciplines and Groups.
Groups. This simplifies the selection of
those
those most rel
releva
evant
nt to the users
users curren
currentt design
design activit
activities
ies;; for example
example,, Stee
Steelwo
lwork,
rk, Pip
Piping
ing,, HVAC
HVAC,, Cab
Cable
le
Trays, etc. Each Discipline may have one or more Groups associated with it, representing more specific
features of the design discipline.
Selecting the required class of checks from the Disciplines

the Disciplines options
options list will automatically
automatically update the Groups
the Groups
options.
Selecting the required group of checks from the Groups

the Groups options
options list will automatically
automatically update the Checks
the Checks list
list
to show all individual checks applicable to the chosen Discipline
Discipline and
and Group
Group..
From the Checks list,

Checks list, select one or more checks that are to be performed on the elements in the Check
Items list.
Items list. The checks are performed by clicking the Check
the Check button
button on the form.
13.2.2
13.2.2 Design
Design Chec
Checker
ker Resu
Results
lts
Clicking the Check
the Check button
button will
automatically display the Checker
the Checker Results
form.
The upper section of the form iindicate

iindicates
s
which elements have passed or failed.
Selecting
Select ing the element
element in this
this sectio
section
n wil
willl
di
disp
spla
lay
y ininfo
form
rmat
atio
ion
n in the
the Messages
secion of the form and apply the relevant
highlight colour to the 3D
the 3D View.
View .


13.
13.3
3 Desig
Design
n Che
Check
cker
er – (Wo
(Worke
rked
d Exa
Exampl
mple)
e)
Navigate
the 3D
the to PIPE
to PIPE
3D View and
View /150-B-6
/150-B-6 in
and select Add
select in>the Model
Add the ModelElement from
Current Explorer
Element , addthe
from it to
Checker form.
form.
From the relevant

relevant option
options
s lists select the follow
following:-
ing:-
 Discipline Piping Application
 Groups Checks for Pipe Lines
From the Checks
the Checks list
list select Vent
select Vent High Points
Click the Check
the Check button.
button.
The Checker
The Checker Results form
Results form is displayed.
The re
resu
sult
lts
s ar
are
e al
also
so di
displ
splay
ayed
ed in the 3D
View..
View
 The results are shown without

highlighting.

Exercise 12 – Design Checker
Navigate to
to BRAN /100-C-12/B2
/100-C-12/B2 and rotate
the by-pass valve by 90 degrees.
Use the Design
the Design Checker utility
utility to check the following:-
 The Drain
The Drain Low Points check
Points check for all pipes owned by ZONE
by ZONE /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01.
/ZONE-PIPING-AREA01.
 The Valve
The Valve Stem Orientation check
Orientation check on BRAN
on BRAN /100-C-12/B2.
/100-C-12/B2.

For information relating to the administration of the Design Checker utility refer to Appendix – C.
CHAPTER 14
14 Creating Isometrics
Detail Isometric production is the subject of another course. However, since it is likely to be a requirement of
the piping designer, the basic techniques, of what is a simple operation are covered here.
Before the creation of Isometric plots the pipes should be free from clashes and data consistency errors.
14
14.1
.1 Crea
Creatin
ting
g Pip
Pipe
e Is
Isom
omet
etri
rics
cs
Navigate to the pipe in the Model Explorer , in this case /100-B-

case /100-B-
2.
In the Isometric
the Isometric group,
group, select the Pipe
the Pipe option
option from the
Pipe button
Pipe button options list to create an isometric sketch of
the pipe.

14
14.2
.2 Crea
Creatin
ting
g Sy
Syst
stem
em Is
Isom
omet
etric
rics
s
Alternatively, in the Isometric
the Isometric group,
group, select the System
the System
option
option from the Pipe
the Pipe button
button options list to create an
isometric sketch of the pipe and any connected pipes.
 For further information relating to the use of the Isodraft

the Isodraft module
module and its administration refer to TM-1873
AVEVA Everything3D (2.1) IsoDraft Administration.
 Prior to the creation of the isometrics it may be necessary to split the pipes into logical section using the
Spool module.
module. Refer to TM-1851 AVEVA Everything3D (2.1) Spooler for details.

Exercise 13 – Creating Isometrics
 Create Pipe
Pipe and System Isometrics
Isometrics for th
the
e pipes created
created in the previous
previous chapters.
chapters.


Appendix A
Appendix – A Piping Settings Form
The Piping
The Piping Settings form
Settings form is used to control some of the default behaviour within the Piping
Piping module.
module.
On the Project
the Project tab,
tab, select Options
select Options >
Discipline,, followed by the Piping
Discipline the Piping
Application Defaults button
Defaults button to display
the Piping
the Piping Settings form
Settings form
The Piping
Piping Settings form
form is spli
splitt in
into
to
three section:-
 Component Editor
Pipe Editor
 Selection
 Laser Data
 Direction Display
A.1 - Piping Settings Form – Component Editor
The Component
Component Editor
Editor sectio
section
n handle
handles
s the default
default beh
behavi
aviour
our that is encount
encountere
ered
d when
when creatin
creating
g and
modifying components.
A.1.1 - Snap Distance
When using the Insert button to insert a component into a section of tube. The result of the pick will be
determi
determined
ned by the proximity
proximity of the adjace
adjacent
nt compone
components
nts in relatio
relation
n to the Snap Distance
Distance.. The Snap
is a ratio of the Outside Diameter of the tube. If the position indicated is closer to the component
Distance is
Distance
than the Snap
the Snap Distance then
Distance then the component will be connected to the component rather than inserted at the
indicated position.

A.1.2 - Min. Tube
This is the tube length that is used when attempting to connect

components with incompatible connections.
A.1.3 - Auto Align
This determines the behavior of the Insert

the Insert button
button when
used to create components in a geometrically incorrect
route, indicated by a dotted line.
If this checkbox is checked:-
 The arrive
arrive of the compon
componenentt will
will be al
alig
igne
ned
d
with the leave of the previous component, if the
With Flow button
 The leave
leave of the componen
componentt being aligned
aligned with
with
the arrive of the next component, if the Against
Flow button
If the checkbox is unchecked then the component will

not be aligned.
(With Flow
Flow))
A.1.4 - Auto Create/Select Adjacent Out of Spec/Skip Connected Comps

Checki
kin
ng these checheckboxes will ill de
dettermi
min
ne whehetther the
co
corre
rresp
spon
ondin
ding
g chec
checkbo
kboxes
xes on the the Select ta
tab of the Piping
Component Editor form
form will be checked by default.


A.1.5 – Multiple Slope Functionality
The Multi
Multiple
ple Slope Function
Functionality
ality checkbox
checkbox will
add the Multi-Slope c che
heck
ckbo
boxx belobelow
w the
the
Rotation/Direction tool of the Modify
the Modify tab.
tab.
This is not standard functionality and as a result it is

not covered in this training guide.
A.1.6 – Non Standard Branch Connections
The No N on Standard Branch

Connections optio
options
ns list
list dete
determi
rmine
nes
s
where the components are sourced from.
This provides some control over what the
general user can do.
 The use of Non-Stan

Non-Standard
dard Branch Connections
Connections has been deemed to be atypic
atypical
al for the Plant/Offshore
Plant/Offshore
customers and has consequently not been covered in the training guide.
A.2 – Piping Settings Form - Pipe Editor

The Pipe Edi
Editor
tor sectio
section
n handle
handles
s the default
default behavio
behaviour
ur that
that is enc
encount
ountere
ered
d when
when creating
creating pip
pipes
es and
branches.
A.2.1 – Sort Piping Specification List
Checki
Chec king
ng the
the Sor
Sortt Pi
Pipi
ping
ng Spec
Specif
ific
icat
atio
ion
n List
List
ch
chec
eckb
kbox
ox wil
illl so
sort
rt the
the pipipe
pe sp
spec
ecif
ific
icat
atio
ions
ns in
into
to
alphabetic
alphabetical
al order
order when
when they are display
displayed
ed on the
Pipe Editor form.
form.


A.2.2 - Auto Create Gaskets and Flanges at Branch
Checking this checkbox will determine whether the

Checking
corresp
correspond
onding
ing che
checkbo
ckbox
x on the Select ta
tab
b of the
the
Piping Component Editor form
Editor form will be checked by
default.
A.3 - Piping Settings Form – Selection
The Selection sect

sectio
ion
n main
mainly
ly ha
hand
ndle
les
s the
the de
defa
faul
ultt be
beha
havi
viou
ourr that
that is
encounter
encoun tered
ed when
when usiusing
ng the Select and Reselect tab
tabs on the
the Piping
form.
A.3.1 - Descriptions
The Descriptions
Descriptions options list sets the format of the component descriptions
th
that
at are
are sh
show
ownn on both
both ththe
e Select and Reselect tabs
tabs of the
the Piping
form.
A.3.2 - Tag Component
This is used to toggle the component type tag shown in the 3D View when using the Piping
the Piping Component
Editor form.
form.

A.3.3 - Tag Constraints
This is used to toggle the highlighting of components which could result in

co
connnnec
ecti
tivi
vity
ty prob
proble
lems
ms if an adadja
jace
cent
nt comp
compon
onen
entt is chchan
ange
ged.
d. In the
the
illustration changing the size of the valve might affect the elbow and the
downstream flange which has an RLOCK set to 0.
 To ill
illust
ustrate
rate this set
settin
ting
g the Ignore Positi
Positioned
oned checkbo
checkbox
x has bee
been
n
unchec
unch ecke
kedd to add the hi
high
ghli
light
ghtin
ing
g to th
the
e do
down
wnstr
strea
eam
m fl
flan
ange
ge,, se
see
e
section A.3.6.
A.3.4 - Auto Reconnect
This is us
This used
ed to to
togg
ggle
le the auto
automat
matic
ic re
reco
conn
nnec
ecti
tion
on fun
functi
ction
on for the
the re
rese
sele
lect
cted
ed compo
compone
nent
nt.. When
When thethe
checkbox is checked the system will automatically attempt to re-establish the connections to the adjacent
Reconnection button
components when the component is selected from the form. If it is unchecked the Reconnection button will
have to be used once the component has been selected.
A.3.5 - Reconnect Free Ends
This is used to toggle whether the connectivity of the pipe head/tail should be re-established if it becomes
disconnected
discon nected as a result of component
component reselection.
reselection.
A.3.6 - Ignore Positioned
It is possible to set the RLOCK attribute of a component to 0 in order to maintain its position. RLOCK is the
attribute for the branch members’ creation status used by Router, see TM-1850 AVEVA Everything3D (2.1)
Pipe Router. Checking this checkbox will reposition the components irrespective of the RLOCK value. With
the checkbox unchecked the reselection process is still possible, but the components with an RLOCK value
of 0 will not be repositioned.
A.4 – Piping Settings Form – Laser Data
The Laser
Laser Data
Data section
section cont
contain
ains
s a Directi
Direction
on Rounding
Rounding checkbo
checkbox
x and a Tolerance textbox.
textbox. With thi
this
s
checkbox checked the direction value will be rounded in accordance with the Tolerance set
Tolerance set when the laser
data is used to define the Head/Tail of the Branch.
A.5 - Piping Settings Form – Direction Display
The Direction
The Direction Display sets
Display sets the default orientation of the Direction
the Direction Tool
that is present on the Modify
the Modify tab
tab of the Piping
form.



APPENDIX B
Appendix B – Insulation and Tracing
B.1 - Adding / Controlling Insulation

Insulation can be added at pipeline or branch level, AVEVA E3D controls the insulation from the insulation
specification that is created in the Paragon
the Paragon module.
module.
The insulati
insulation
on can be control
controlled
led by the range of tempera
temperatur
ture
e
and bore to control the thickness of insulation to be added. The
image shows an extract from the Paragon
the Paragon module.
module.
When a pipe is created, using the Pipe Editor: Create Pipe

fo
form
rm th
the
e ininsu
sula
lati
tion
on spec
specifi
ifica
cati
tion
on and
and tempe
tempera
ratu
ture
re can
can be
specified for the pipeline. In this case the insulation thickness is
dependent upon the bore and temperature.
Alternatively, the thickness of the insulation can be selected

directly. In this case the temperature and bore are irrelevant for
the purpose of insulation.
insulation.
Once this information exists against a routed pipe the insulation can be displayed. On the VIEW tab, in the
VIEW tab,
Settings group,
Settings the Graphics button
group, click the Graphics button to display the Graphics
the Graphics Settings form.
Settings form. The Representation
The Representation tab
contains an Insulation Visibility / Translucency options list allowing the translucency of the insulation to be
set.
Sometimes insulation may not be required over the total length of the branch, for example the section of a
pipe upstream of a feature may not require insulation. The insulation can be terminated at a component in
(Ispec)) to Nulref . This will remove
the pipe by setting the components Insulation Specification attribute (Ispec
the insulation from the component and the implied pipe downstream of the component. The insulation can
be removed from further components in the pipe if required, using the same method.


B.1.1 - Controlling Insulation between Components
In this example insulation has been added to PIPE /100-C-16.

/100-C-16. The insulation is to be removed from the
branch above the penetr
penetration
ation through STRU
through STRU /EQUIP_SUPPORT.
/EQUIP_SUPPORT.
Navigate to the flange

at the head of the
branch.
From the
the Reselect tab of the Piping Component Editor
form select None
select None from
from the Insulation
the Insulation options
options list.
Click the Yes

button on the
Confirm form.
Confirm form.
The insulation has been removed from the flange to the

first elbow. The ATTA used for the penetration has been
(ig
igno
nore
red.
d. ) attribute
Spkbrk)
Spkbrk To ov over
erco
come
of me ATTA
the this
this needs
the
the Specifica
Speci
to befication
tion Break
changed.Break
Navigate to the ATTA and from the right mouse button context sensitive menu select Attributes… Set the
Spkbrk attribute
Spkbrk to True by
attribute to True by clicking the check box.

This insulation has now been included between the

ATTA and the elbow.
 AT
ATTAs
TAs can be add
added
ed al
along
ong the im
impl
plie
ied
d tu
tube
be
specif
spec ific
ical
ally
ly to co
cont
ntro
roll th
the
e bo
boun
unda
dary
ry of th
the
e
insulation.
The gaps in insulation can also be seen on the isometric produced for the pipe. The gaps in the dashed line
show the areas where the insulation was removed.
It is also possible to edit the Stext attribu

attribute
te of the
ATTA to
ATTA to display a note on the isometric. In this case,
the Stext attri
attribu
bute
te was
was set
set to Insulat
Insulation
ion Brea
Breakk /
Penetration..
Penetration
 The Branch contains

contains a pseudo attribute
attribute of INLENGTH that can be reported on.

B.2 - Adding Tracing
A tracing specification is required for pipelines that may need some form of heating i.e. fresh water pipelines
exposed to the elements. This specification is set up from the Paragon
the Paragon module.
module.
Tracing can be added to a pipe from the Pipe

Editor:
Edi tor: Create
Create Pipe or
or Pipe
Pipe Editor:
Editor: Modify
Modify
Pipe forms. From the Tracing options list select
Pipe
the type of tracing required and click the Apply
button.
Pipes
Pipes with
with Tra
Traci
cing
ng can
can be hihigh
ghli
ligh
ghted
ted in the
the
3DView by
3DView by selecting the Tracing
the Tracing checkbox
checkbox from
the Graphics
the Graphics Settings form.
Settings form.
If a piping isometric is produced the tracing on the pipe will be shown as a chain-dotted line.
 The Branch contains
contains a pseudo attribute
attribute of TRLENGTH that can be reported on.

APPENDIX C
Appendix C – Design Checker Admin Overview
The Design Checker chapter

chapter of this training guide showed how the form can be used to perform various
checks
checks of the
the Model data.
data. This appendix
appendix has been
been added
added to illust
illustrat
rate
e how the che
checks
cks themsel
themselves
ves are
constructed
constructed to enhance
enhance the understanding
understanding of the utility.
 The creation and modification

modification of the checks is an administrative
administrative function.
function. Consequently
Consequently a piping design
user will not have access to this form. For the following section the SYSTEM user is used.
C.1 - Design Checker Admin Form
From th
From the
e Admin tab,
tab, in the
the Configure group
group,, click
click the
the
Checker button to display the Data
the Data Checker Configuration
form.
The administrator uses this form to create the

Disciplines and
Disciplines and Groups
Groups that
that are displayed on the
Checker form.
form.
The Checks are
The Checks are added to the Groups
the Groups.. Each
check has a name and an associated macro
function.

C.1.2 - Vent High Points Admin Detail
The detail of the Vent Hig

Highh Poin
Points
ts check
check use
used
d in the worked
worked
example of the Design Checker chapter is selected in a similar
fashion to how the check is selected from the Checker form:
form:
From the relevant

relevant options
options list select:-
 Classes Piping Application
 Groups Check
Checks
s for Pipe Lines
From the Checks
the Checks list
list select Vent
select Vent High Points
This updates the information at the bottom of the form listing the
Name, Description and Function of the selected check.
 If there are any rules that can be modified the Edit Rul
Rule
e
Data button
Data button is active.
Clicking Edit
Clicking Edit Rule Data
Data button
button will open the following form.
 The asterisk
asterisk * in the text
text
field indicates
indicates All sizes,
Fluid Ref etc. are
handled.
From the information on the form it can be seen that the Vent High Points check
Points check covers the following:
 Tee or Olet exist

exist with
with a Branch outlet
outlet of 15mm or above.
above.
 Branch must
must contain
contain a Valve
Valve and a Closure
 Will check all Fluids
 Will Check All Pipes
 Will Check
Check all
all pi
pipes
pes regardless
regardless of name
 Will show all

all High Points
Points (un-ticked
(un-ticked shows just the
the highest point)
point)

C.1.3 - Drain Low Points Admin Detail
If the Drain
the Drain Low Points check
Points check is selected from the Checks
Checks options
options list the form will display that it can only
be used to check a pipe between 15 - 50mm N.B. when the Fluid Reference is set to /FRESH-WATER.
 In the Design
Checker chapchapte
terr no
pipes failed this test
because none of them
had
ha d a fl
flui
uid
d re
refer
feren
ence
ce
of /FRESHWATER
/FRESHWATER .
C.1.4 - Valve Stem Orientation Admin Detail
The detail of the Valve

the Valve Stem Orientation check
Orientation check that was used in
the exercise of the Design
the Design Checker chapter
chapter is as follows:
From the relevant options list select:-
 Classes Piping Application
 Groups Checks for Pipe

Pipe Componens
Componens
From the Checks
the Checks list
list select Valve
select Valve Stem Orientation.
Orientation.
Click Edit
Click Data button.
Edit Rule Data button.
The check indicates that with the exception of Sea Water a valve
stem can be rotated from the vertical between 0 and 45deg. In the
case of Sea Water the Valve Stem must always be vertical.


APPENDIX D
Appendix D – Hole Management Request and Approval Workflow
D.1 – Hole Creation/Modification Workflow
In this workflow the Originator creates the ‘virtual’ hole and then either requests it or deletes the entry.
Once requested, the Originator may cancel the request and delete the entry prior to it being reviewed.
If requested and not cancelled or deleted, the Reviewer checks the hole details and, if OK, approves the
hole, thereby creating the ‘actual’
‘actual’ hole.
If the Reviewer rejects the hole then the Originator can either modify the ‘virtual’ hole and re-request the
hole or cancel the request and delete the entry.
D.2 – Redundant Hole Workflow

In this workflow the ‘actual’ hole has been created. The Originator decides that the hole is now redundant
and sets its status to Redundant.
Before the Originator can delete the entry the Reviewer must agree that the hole is redundant.


D.3 – Rejected Hole Workflow
In thi
this
s workflo
workflow
w the ‘act
‘actual
ual’’ hole
hole has been
been create
created.
d. The Review
Reviewer,
er, possibly
possibly due to changed
changed condit
condition
ions,
s,
decides to reject the hole. The Originator has the option to:
 Modify the
the hole and re-request
re-request it, whereby
whereby it will go through
through the normal
normal review and approval
approval cycle.
cycle.
 Cancel
Cancel the request,
request, in which
which case the ‘virtual’
‘virtual’ hole
hole details
details remain
 •Delet
•Delete
e the entry,
entry, in which
which case the entire
entire hole is delete
deleted
d and the ‘virtual
‘virtual’’ hole and associ
associati
ation
on
deleted. The ‘actual’ hole is deleted and the panel restored to its original state.

TM-1810-AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Pipework Modelling

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM-1810-AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1) Pipework Modelling

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guide Pipework Modelling

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

This page is intentionally left blank.

Copyright © 2013 2 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

Date Revision Description Author Reviewed Approved

1.3 AVEVA's total liability

Copyright © 2013 3 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

@AVEVA Solutions Limited 2015

Copyright © 2013 4 www.aveva.com

Copyright © 2013 5 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

5.2.2 Quick Pipe Routing Using Elbows

Copyright © 2013 6 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

11.5 The Hole Management

Copyright © 2013 7 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

C.1.4 - Valve Stem Orientation Admin Detail ........................................................................................

Copyright © 2013 8 www.aveva.com

 Modify pipe, branch and component

 Use the Editor

 Use Quick Pipe Router

 Create sloping pipes

Modify bore and specification

 Run Data Consisten

 Perform simple Clash Checks.

 Use Design Checker

 Produce Check Isometrics

Copyright © 2013 9 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

by bold dark turquoise text.

Information the user has to enter will be bold red text.

System prompts will be bold, italic and in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose

Example files or inputs will be in the b

Copyright © 2013 10 www.aveva.com

Copyright © 2013 11 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

2.3 Piping Tab

 Pipe Stress Interface

Copyright © 2013 12 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

These simple concepts enable any number of piping configurations to

Pipe branches serve two purpose

 They own the

Copyright © 2013 13 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

 A1A = ANSI CLASS 150 CARBO N STEEL

A3B = ANSI CLASS 300 CARBO N STEEL

The specification letters are as follows: -

Copyright © 2013 14 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

The upper section of the form allows the Pipe Name to be

Not all of these fields are mandatory.

The Select Pipe Specification

Copyright © 2013 15 www.aveva.com

AVEVA Everything3D™ (2.1)

Add EQUI D1201 a

Enter the Pipe Name, 80-B-7.

Select the Primary

Select the required Pipe

Select the Bore to be 80mm and

The new pipe has been created in ZONE